Mame Ne ne Melitta MO Ty eters Oh
es ee a
‘ a ' 7
ans
3 : a
=
\
\
t
~ ag a Soe
THE H
Cr
ONCRARY SECRETARIES. 56
3 OF PAPERS ARE ALONE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE STATEMENTS
MADE AND THE OPINIONS EXPRESSED THEREIN, =
ss
re + “ oe
ag
BLISHED BY THE SOCIETY, 5 ELIZABETH STREET, SYDNEY.
Toes
ISSUED AS A ©
OMPLETE VOLUME, MAY, 1929.
ae
CONTENTS.
VOLUME LXII.
Art, I1.—PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. By Professor J. Dougnas
Stewart, B.V.Sc., M.R.C.V,S.. a aes
Art. II.—The Chemistry of Western Astoteatan Sandalwaad Oil.
= Part I. By A. R. Penrotp, F.A.C.1., F.C.S. “_ Anes
ust 22nd, 1928.) ....
Arr. IlI.—The Occurrence of a ones of capes ‘a Ecce
dives, as determined by Chemical Analysis of the Essential
Oils. Part II. (With remarks on the Ortho-cresol method
for estimation of Cineol). By A. R.-Penroup, F.A.C.L,
F.C.S., and F, R. Morrison, A.A.C.I., F.C.S. (Issued July
4th. 1928.) -. .
_ Art. IV.—Some Ra hata: on es Woodiness or Bullet Dies:
of Passion Fruit. By R. J. Nopuz, Ph.D., M.Se. [With
Plates [- IV. | (Giewed October 29th, 1928.)... oes
Arr. V.— Brown Rot of Fruits, and Associated Diseases, in Aus-
tralia. Part I. History of the Diseases and Determination -
of the Causal Organisms. By T. H. Harrison, B.Sc.Agr,
[With Plates V - IX and one oe figure.) Tssued October -
29th, 1928.)... ive
PAGE
60 ~
712
79
99
Ary, VI.—Acacia Seedlings, Part XIII, By RB. HL ins aer
C.B.E.. F.LS., Bee Plates X - XIII. J Coates November
7th, 1928.) .. s
Art, VII.—The Geslony of Port Se ckuae Past L Phys
and General Geology. By C. A. Sussmitcu, F.G.S., and
Wm. Clark. PartIl. Petrography. ByC. A. SussMILoH,
F.G.S., and W. A. Grea. [With Plates XIV XVI and two
text figures.] (Issued November 29th, 1928.) 2
Art. VIII.—The Outbreak of Springs in Autumn. By R, H.
CamBaae, C.B.E., F.L.S. . (Issued December 5th, 1928.)
Art. [X.—Description of Three New Species of Eucalyptus aay:
One Acacia. By W. F. BLAKELY. oe Plates 1
(Issued Detobar 3rd, 1928.) x
Art. X.—The Chemistry of the Exudation coe Sin Wood of Pai
taspodon Motleyi. By A. R. Penroup, F.A.C.L, F.C.S., and
F. R. Morrison, A.A.C. L., F.C.S. Cane? January 30th,
1929.) Fy ae me ee
Art. XI.—The Essential Oil foes a Roisdin in the Pinwites
Section from Fraser Island. 7 %y A. R. Punronp. F.A.C.I.,
F.C.S. (Issued February 7th34.529.) .. oa
Art. XII.—An Examination of Defective Gecnon: (Bacudebaiee
Taxifolia). By M. B. Wxtcu, B.Se., A.I.C. a. Plates
XXI-XXIII.} (Issued February 7th, 1929) .
Art. XIII.—On the Probable Tertiary Age of Certain ee South
Wales Sedentary Soils. By W. R. Browne, D.Sc. (Issued
February 12th, 1929.) _... ire oe wae ee va
152
168
192
_ 201
218
225
235
251
POUR N AL
AND
PROCEEDINGS
OF THE
ROYAL SOCIETY
NEW SOUTH WALES
FOR
1925
(INCORPORATED 1881.)
ied: 1 xo:
EDITED BY
THE HONORARY SECRETARIES.
THE AUTHORS OF PAPERS ARE ALONE RESPONSIBLE FORK THE STATEMENTS
MADE AND THE OPINIONS EXPRESSED THEREIN.
SYDNEY:
PUBLISHED BY THE SOCIETY, 5 ELIZABETH STREET, SYDNEY.
ISSUED AS A COMPLETE YOLUME, MAY, 1929,
i nad i snl te 1
\ %
/ ke
tM ‘ns
han
Phat
ART.
ART.
ART.
ART.
ART.
ART,
ART,
ART.
ART.
ART.
ART.
ART.
ART.
CONTENTS.
VOLUME LXIl.
I.— PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. By Professor J. Dovuaguas
STEWART, B.V.Sc., M.R.C.V.S. Hg eae
II.—The Chemistry of Western Aeaee an eee Oil.
Part I. By A. R. Penroup, F.A.C.1., F.C.S. Moers Aug-
ust 22nd, 1928.) :
III.—The Occurrence of a ae of varieties ‘of acai yutas
dives, as determined by Chemical Analysis of the Essential
Oils. Part II. (With remarks on the Ortho-cresol method
for estimation of Cineol). By A. R. Penrouo, F.A.C.I.,
F.C.S., and F. R. Morrison, A.A.C.1., F.C.8. (Issued Tuly
4th, 1928.) . -
IV.—Some Bos « on ar Woodiness or Bullet ie
of Passion Fruit. By R. J. Nopun, Ph.D., M.Sc. [With
Plates [-IV.| (Issued October 29th, 1928.)... fea
V.— Brown Rot of Fruits, and Associated Diseases, in Aus-
traha. Part I. History of the Diseases and Determination
of the Causal Organisms. By T’. H. Harrison, B.Sc. Agr.
[With Plates V-IX and one teat figure. Issued October
29th, 1928.)...
VI.—Acacia Seedlings, Bart XIII. Be R. ce chee
C.B.E.. F.LS., De Plates X - pan Snes November
7th, 1928.) ..
VII.—The cece of Port sésnicne Part IU eee
and General Geology. By C. A. SussminicH, F.G.S., and
Wm. Clark. Part II. Petrography. ByC.A. SussMILcH,
F.G.S., and W. A. Greig. [With Plates XIV - XVI and two
text figures. ] (Issued November 29th, 1928.)
VIII.—The Outbreak of Springs in Autumn. By R. H.
CamBaa@e, C.B.E., F.L.8. (Issued December 5th, 1928.) ...
IX.—Description of Three New Species of Eucalyptus and
One Acacia. By W. F. BLAKELY. ee Plates see
(Issued October 8rd, 1928.)
X.—The Chemistry of the Exudation it tie Wood of Pen-
taspodon Motleyi. By A. R. Penroup, F.A.C.L, F.C.S., and
F. R. Morrison, A.A.C.I., F.C.S. a January 30th,
1929.)
XI.—The Tecate Oil es a roe in fe Panne
Section from Fraser Island. By A. R. Penroup. F.A.C.I,
F.C.S. (Issued February 7th, i929.) .. : oe
XII.—An Examination of Defective Oresn (peaseinga
Taxifolia). By M. B. Weucn, B.Sc., A.C. [With Plates
XXI-XXIII.} (Issued February 7th, 1929) ... is eh
XIII.—On the Probable Tertiary Age of Certain New South
Wales Sedentary Soils. By W. R. Browns, D.Sc. (Issued
February 12th, 1929.) ae iS: oa as ee
PAGE
60
72
79
99
152
218
225
235
251
(iv.)
Pace
Art. XIV.—The Essential Oil of a new species of Anemone leaf
Boronia, Rich in Ocimene. By A. BR. Panroup, F.A.C.L,
F.C.S. (Issued February 12th, 1929.) w. 2638
Art. XV.—On some Aspects of Differential Erosion. By W.R.
Browne, D.Sc. ee ee teat Haute se lag aga
19th, 1929.)... ; 273
Art. XVI.—Further otee on the Gene Bomiae By B. Ben Os
(Issued February 19th, 19239.) is 290
Art. XVII.—Alkalization and other Deuteric prisdennderat in ai
Saddleback Trachybasalt at Port Kembla. By W. R.
Browne. D.Sc. and H. P. Warrs, F.C.S. [With Plates
XXIV, XXV and two ee ae an ei Nopeeee 19th,
1929.) : 303
Art. XVIII.—Notes on some Oxeanints of Tomats Pulp. By
G. L. WuInpDRED, (communicated He Gilbert oo
(Issued February 19th, 1929.) 341
ArT. X[X.—Notes on some Australian T oar of ane Monimiaceae.
By M B. We cu, B.Sce., A.L.C. [With Plates co.
(Issued February 19th, 1929. ) ie : 350
Arr. XX.—Note on a Fossil Shrimp from the Hadkoeuney ea
stones. By CHARLEL CuiILTON, M.A., D.Sc., M.B., (com-
municated by W. S. Dun). Bia Plate en (issued
February 19th, 1929.) 366
Art, XXI.—Cyanogenetic Glucosidle in eatin Pinte. By
H. Finnemonrg, B.Sc., and C. B. Cox, B.Sc. (Issued March
19th, 1929.).. uae 6c van sire a os | “OO0
ABSTRACT OF ee i,— XXV1,
PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL SECTION ...
XXV1. — XXXI1X.
PROCEEDINGS OF 'THE SECTION OF INDUSTRY xi. - xl.
PROCEEDINGS Of THE SECTION OF PHYSICAL SCLENCE xlv. —li.
Tirte Page, Contents, Novices, PUBLICATIONS, ... sa (i. - vi.)
OFFICERS FOR 1928-1929) . (vii.)
List or Members, Xe. (ix.)
InpDEx To VotumeE LXII.
lii.
NOTICE.
Tue Roya Society of New South Wales originated in 182] as
the ‘Philosophical Society of Australasia”; after an interval of
inactivity, it was resuscitated in 1850, under the name of the
‘¢ Australian Philosophical Society,” by which title it was known
until 1856, when the name was changed to the ‘ Philosophical
Society of New South Wales”; in 1866, by the sanction of Her
Most Gracious Majesty Queen Victoria, it assumed its present
title, and was incorporated by Act of the Parliament of New
South Wales in 1881.
TO AUTHORS.
Authors should submit their papers in typescript and in
a condition ready for printing. Al! physico-chemical symbols
and mathematical formule should be so clearly written that the
compositor should find no difficulty in reading the manuscript.
Sectional headings and tabular matter should not be underlined.
Pen-illustrations accompanying papers should be made with
black Indian ink upon smooth white Bristol board. Lettering
and numbers should be such that, when the illustration or graph
is reduced to 34 inches in width, the lettering will be quite
legible. On graphs and text figures any lettering may be lightly
inserted in pencil. Microphotographs should be rectangular
rather than circular, to obviate too great a reduction. The size
of a full page plate in the Journal is 4 x 6} inches, and the
general reduction of illustrations to this limit should be considered
by authors. When drawings, etc., are submitted in a state
unsuitable for reproduction, the cost of the preparation of such
drawings for the process-block maker must he borne by the
author. The cost of colouring plates or maps must also be borne
by the author.
FORM OF BEQUEST.
FE bequeath the sum of £ to the Royat Society oF
New SoutH WaAtzgs, Incorporated by Act of the Parliament of
New South Wales in 1881, and I declare that the receipt of the
Treasurer for the time being of the said Corporation shall be an
effectual discharge for the said Bequest, which I direct to be paid
within calendar months after my decease, without
any reduction whatsoever, whether on account of Legacy Duty
thereon or otherwise, out of such part of my estate as may be
lawfully applied for that purpose.
[Those persons who feel disposed to benefit the Royal Society of
New South Wales by Legacies, are recommended to instruct their
Solicitors to adopt the above Form of Bequest. |
PUBLICATIONS.
)
The following publications of the Society, if in print, can be
obtained at the Society’s House in Elizabeth-street:—
Transactions of the Philosophical] Society, N.S. W., 1862-5, pp. 374, out of print.
Vols. I—x1 Transactions of the Royal Society, N.S. W., 1867—1877,
99
“ xu Journal and Proceedings 9 re 1878, ,, 324, price 10s.6d.
” XII ” 29 ” ” 99 1879, 99 255, or)
5 XIV os ae <3 ‘5 es 1880, ,, 391, Es
” XV ey ” ” ” ” 1881, 99 440, 9
Ss XVI =p 53 3 4 a 1882, ,, 327, 2
9 XVII ” ” ” +9 9 1883, 9 324, ”
” XVIII ” ” ” ” ” 1884, 9 224, 99
99 XIX ” 99 ” 29 99 1885, 99 240, 99
99 XX 39 9 99 ” 99 1886, 99 396, 99
- XXI _ 3 a5 99 » 1887, ,, 296, »
99 XXIT 29 9 19 9 2? 1888, 93 390. ””
9 XXIII 9 ” ” ” oe) 1889, 29 534, 9
on) XXIV 99 9 7) ” 9 1890, +) 290, ”
” XXV ” ” ” 29 +) 1391, 7) 348, 9
99 XXVI ” oo) ” 9 ”9 1892, 99 426, ”
” XXVII 99 ” 39 ” ” 1893, oe) 530, 99
” XXVIII o) 7) ” oF) ” 1894, 99 368, 9
9 XXIX 9 ” 9 ” ” 1895, ” 600, ”
” XXX 99 ” ” ” 99 1896, 9 568, 9
99 XXXI 99 29 9 ” ”9 1897, 29 626, ”
” XXXII ” oe) ” ” +) 1898, ” 476, ”9
” XXXII ” ” ” +) ” 1899, ”9 400, 99
9% XXXIV ” ye ” 99 9 1500, 9 484, 39
” XXXV ” 9 99 99 99 1901, 9 581, 39
” XXXVI ” ” ” ” ” 1902, ” 531, ”
2 XXXVIT 9 ” ” ” ” 1903, 9 663, 9°
», XXXVITT 29 9 ” ” 29 1904, ) 604, 2”
” XXXIX oe) ” ” mh) ee) 1905, 99 274, ye)
9 XL 29 : ” ” 29 39 1906, oe) 368, 99
29 XLI 99 ” ” 9 99 1907, 99 377, 99
ee) XLII 2? 99 9 oH) oe) 1908, 99 593, ”9
99 XLIII +) 99 ” 99 ” 1909, oD) 466, 9
” XLIV 9 oy) oo) ” Ly) 1910, 3” 719, 9
”9 XLV 79 9 ” 9 ” 1911, 29 611, 99
oe) XLVI ye) 99 oe) oe) oy) 1912, 99 275, 9
99 XLVI 99 ” 9 ” 99 1918, 99 318, om)
9 XLVITI 99 99 ” 99 99 1914, 99 584, 9
” XLIX 39 99 ” 7) 29 1915, 9 587, 9
” L ey) oF) ” ” 29 1916, 29 362, oy)
99 LI 39 39 99 99 99 1917, 39 786, 99
9 LII ” oo) 9 9 ) 1918, 99 624, ye)
99 LIII 99 oe) 99 oe) 9 1919, oe) 414, 99
” LIV 99 9 99 » or) 1920, ,, 312, price £1 ls.
9 LV 99 ” oI) ” 99 1921, 99 418, 99
9) LVI 99 99 99 99 99 1922, bP) 372, 99
” LVII 99 99 99 ” 99 1928, oy) 421, 99
” LVIII 29 9 ) ” oP) 1924, oy) 366, ”9
” LIX ” 99 oe) oo) ”” 1925, ” 46S, ”
99 LX 9 99 7 3 ” 1926, ” 470, 99
9° LXI 99 be] 9 9 99 1927, 99 492, 99
? LXII 29 bh 79 99 ae 1928, 99 458, 99
Aopal Society of Sew Sonth ales
Green Ee Es ys 2 @Oike “LO2S8-Lo2°-
Patron:
HIS EXCELLENCY THE RIGHT HONOURABLE JOHN
LAWRENCE, BARON STONEHAVEN, P.c., G.c.M.a4., D.s.0.
Governor-General of the Commonwealth of Australia.
Vice-Patron:
HIS EXCELLENCY SIR DUDLEY RAWSON STRATFORD de
CHATR, k.c.B., M.V.O.
Governor of the State of New South Wales.
President:
W. POOLE, me, M.mst.c.£., M.1.’M.M., etc,
Vice-Presidents:
R. H. CAMBAGE, c.3.u., F.L.S.* Prof. R. D. WATT, m.a., B.sc.
C. ANDERSON, .a., D.Sc. Prof. J. DOUGLAS STEWART,
B.V.Se., M.R.C.V.S.
Hon. Treasurer:
Prof. H. G. CHAPMAN, m.p.
Hon. Secretaries:
Prof. O. U. VONWILLER, | C. A. SUSSMILCH,
BSc., F.Inst.P, ’ F.G.S., F.S.T.C., etc.
Members of Council:
EK. C. ANDREWS, B.a., F.G@.s. Prof. C. KE. FAWSITT, p.sc., ph.v.
G. H. BRIGGS, B.sc., php. G. A. JULIUS, B.sc., w.8.,.M-1.Mec.E.
R. W. CHALLINOR, F.1.¢., F.c.s. J. NANGLE, 0.B.E., F.R.A.S.
EK. CHEEL. R. J. NOBLE, m.se:, Bsc. Agr. Ph.D.
Prof. L. A. COTTON, m.a., D.Sc. Rev. E. F. PIGOT, sJ., B.a., M.B
*Deceased 28th Noyember, 1928
ihe
i
he
r
4
re ome
Png aU Ns hs Nae
«
fist OF THE MEMBERS
OF THE
AMopal Society of Act South Wales.
eee
P Members who have contributed papers which have been published in the Society’s
Journal.
The numerals indicate the number of such contributions.
£ Life Members.
Elected,
1908
1904
1898
1905
1909
1915
1919
1923
1878
1924
1919
1894
1894
1926
1919
1925
1908
1895
1909
1926
1923
1919
1923
Ps
Bo
P 27
P2
| Abbott, George Henry, B.A., M.B.,Ch.M., 185 Macquarie-street;
p.v. ‘Cooringa,’ 252 Liverpool Road, Summer Hill.
Adams, William John, M.1.Mech.E., 175 Clarence-street.
Alexander, Frank Lee, William-street, Granville.
Anderson, Charles, u.A., D.Sc. Hdin., Director of the Australian
Museum, College-street. (President, 1924.) Vice-President.
Andrews, Ernest C., 3B.A., F.G.8.. Hon. Mem. Washington
Academy of Sciences, Government Geologist, Department
of Mines, Sydney. (President, 1921.)
| Armit, Henry William, m.r.c.s. Eng., u.R.c.P. Lond., The
Printing House, Seamer-street. Glebe.
Aurousseau, Marcel, B.sc., c/o Post Office, Manly.
Baccarini, Antonio, Doctor in Chemistry (Florence).
Backhouse, His Honour Judge A. P., m.a., ‘ Melita,’ Elizabeth
Bay.
Bailey, Victor Albert, M.A., D.Phil., F.Inst.P., Assoc.-Professor of
Physics in the University of Sydney.
Baker, Henry Herbert, 15 Castlereagh-street.
Baker, Richard Thomas, The Crescent. Cheltenham.
{Balsille, George, ‘ Lauderdale,’ N.E. Valley, Dunedin, N.Z.
Bannon, Joseph, Demonstrator in Physics in the University of
Sydney; p.r. ‘ Dunisla,’ The Crescent, Homebush.
Bardsley, John Ralph, ‘The Pines,’ Lea Avenue, Five Dock.
Barker-Woden, Lucien, F.R.G.s., Commonwealth Department
of Navigation, William Street, Meibourne.
Barling, John, u.s., ‘St. Adrians, Raglan-street, Mosman.
Barraclough, Sir Henry, K.B.&., B.E., M.M.E., M. Inst. C.E.,
M.1I. Mech. E., Memb. Soc. Promotion Eng. Education;
Memb. Internat. Assoc. Testing Materials; Dean of the
Faculty of Engineering and Professor of Mechanical
Engineering in the University of Sydney; p.r. ‘Marmion,’
Victoria-street, Lewisham.
Benson, William Noel, p.sc. Syd., B.A. Cantab., F.a.s., Professor
of Geology in the University of Otago, Dunedin, N.Z.
en Sydney Ernest, B.sc.agr. 70 Young-street, Annan-
ale.
Berry, Frederick John, F.c.s., ‘Roseneath,’ 51 Reynolds-street,
Neutral Bay.
Bettley-Cooke, Hubert Vernon, ‘The Hollies,’ Minter-street,
Canterbury.
Birks, George Frederick, c/o Potter & Birks, 15 Grosvenor-st.
lected.
1916
1920
1915
1913
1923
1905
1888
1893
1917
1926
1920
1922 |
1916
1926
1917
1891
1923
1919
1922
P4
PA
P4
Pal
P15
P 10
(X.)
Birrell, Septimus, cjo Margarine Co., Edinburgh Road,
Marrickville.
Bishop, Eldred George, 8 Belmont-road, Mosman.
Bishop, John, 24 Bond-street.
Bishop, Joseph Eldred, Killarney-street. Mosman.
Blakely, William Faris, ‘ Myola,’ Florence-street, Hornsby.
Blakemore, George Henry, 683 Pitt Street, Sydney.
{Blaxland, Walter, F.R.c.s. Eng., L.R.c.p. Lond., ‘ Inglewood,’
Florida Road, Palm Beach, Sydney.
Blomfield, Charles E., B.c.e. Melb., ‘ Woombi,’ Kangaroo Camp,
Guyra.
Bond, Robert Henry, ‘Eastbourne,’ 27 Cremorne-road, Cre-
morne Point.
Booker, Frederick William, B.sc., ‘Dunkeld,’ Nicho!son-street,
Chatswood.
Booth, Edgar Harold, M.C., B.Sc., F.Inst.P., Lecturer and Demon-
stratorin Physics in the University of Sydney.
Bradfield, John Job Crew, D.Sc. Eng., M.E., M. Inst. C.E., M. Inst. E. Aust.
Chief Engineer, Metropolitan Railway Construction, Rail-
way Department, Sydney.
Bragg, James Wood, B.a., c/o Gibson, Battle &Co. Ltd.,Kent-st.
Branch, Kenneth James F., 99 North Steyne, Manly.
Breakwell, Ernest, B.A., B.Sc, Headmaster Agricultural
School, Yanco.
Brennand, Henry J. W., B.A., M.D., Chm. Syd., v.D., Surgeon
Commander R.A.N. Ret., 223 Macquarie-street; p.r. 73
Milsons Road, Cremorne.
Brereton, Ernest Le Gay, B sc., Lecturer and Demonstrator in
Chemistry in the University of Sydney.
Briggs, George Henry, B.8c., Ph.p., Lecturer and Demonstrator
in Physics in the University of Sydney.
Brough, Patrick, M.a., B.Se, B.Sc, (Agr.) (Glasgow), Lecturer
in Botany in the University of Sydney.
Brown, Herbert, ‘ Sikoti,’ Alexander-street, Collaroy Beach,
Sydney.
Brown, James B., St. Andrew’s, Mont Victor Road, East
Kew, H. 4, Victoria.
Browne, William Rowan, pD.sc., Assistant-Professor of Geology
in the University of Sydney.
{Burfitt, W. Fitzmaurice, B.A., M.B., Ch.M. B.Sc, Syd., ‘Wyom-
ing,’ 175 Macquarie-street, Sydney.
Buckitt, Arthur Neville St. George, u.B, B.sc., Professor of
Anatomy in the University of Sydney.
Burrows, George Joseph, B.sc, Lecturer and Demonstrator in
Chemistry in the University of Sydney; p.r. Watson-street,
Neutral Bay.
Calvert, Thomas Copley, Assoc.M.Inst.c.E, Department of Pub-
lic Works, Sydney.
Cameron, Lindsay Duncan, Hilly-street, Mortlake.
Campbell, Alfred W., M.pD., ch.m. Edin., 183 Macquarie-street.
Carment, David, r.1.a. Grt. Brit. @ Irel. ¥.F.A., Scot., 4 Whaling
Road, North Sydney.
Carruthers, Sir Joseph Hector. K.c.M.G., M.1..C., M.a., Syd., LL.D.,
St. Andrews, ‘Highbury,’ Waverley.
lected
1903
1913
1909
1913
1925
‘1909
1876
1896
1920
1913
1928
‘1882
1919
‘1909
1892
1886
1921
1927
‘1925
1912
‘1886
1928
1890
A919
1921
1921
1894
(xais)
P3) Carslaw, Horatio S., m.a., Se.b., Professor of Mathematics
in the University of Sydney.
P 3| Challinor, Richard Westman, F.1.c., F.c.s., Lecturer in Chem-
istry, Sydney ‘l'echnical College.
P 2| Chapman, Henry G., m.p., B.s., Director of Caxcer Research,
University of Sydney. Hon. Treasurer.
P 16) Cheel, Edwin, Curator National Herbarium, Botanic Gardens,
Sydney.
P 1| Clark, William E., ‘ Acacia,’ Cambridge-street, Epping.
P 20} Cleland, John Burton, m.p., ch.m., Professor of Pathology inthe
University of Adelaide. (President 1917.)
Codrington, John Frederick, m.r.c.s. Eng., L.R.c.e. Lond, and
Edin., ‘Roseneath,’ 8 Wallis-street, Woollahra.
P4| Cook, W. E., m.c.e. Melb., M.Inst.,C.E., Burroway-st., Neutral
Bay.
Cooke, Frederick, c/o Meggitt’s Limited, 26 King-street.
P 3] Coombs, F. A., F.c.s., Instructor of Leather Dressing and
Tanning, Sydney Technical College; p.r. Bannerman
Crescent, Rosebery.
Coppleson, Victor Marcus, u.s., Chu ,r.rc.s., 225 Macquarie-
street, Sydney.
Cornwell, Samuel, J.P., ‘Capanesk,’ Tyagarah, North Coast.
Cotton, Frank Stanley, B.sc., Chief Lecturer and Demonstrator
in Physiology in the University of Sydney.
P 6| Cotton, Leo Arthur, m.a., D.Sc, Professor of Geology in the
University of Sydney,
P1| Cowdery, George R., Assoc.M.Inst.C.E., ‘Glencoe,’ Torrington
Road, Strathfield.
Crago, W. H., u.n.c.s. Eng., u.R.c.p. Lond., 185 Macquarie-st.
tCresswick, John Arthur, 101 Villiers-street, Rockdale.
P 1] Currey, Geoffrey Saunders, 13 Princess-avenue, Homebush.
Curry, Harris Eric Marshall, c/o M. Barker, Esq., Kincumber,
N.S. W.
Curtis, Louis Albert, L.s., F.t.s. (N.S.W.), v.p., Room 618,
New Government Savings Bank, Castlereagh-street; p.r.
No. 1 Mayfair Flats, Macleay-street,; Darlinghurst.
P 23) David, Sir Edgeworth, K.B.z., C.M.G., D.S.0, B.A., D.Sc, ¥.R.S.,
F.G.S., Wollaston Medallist, Emeritus Professor of Geo-
logy and Physical Geography in the University of Sydney;
p-r. ‘Coringah,’ Sherbroke-road, Hornsby. (President
1895, 1910.)
Davidson, Walter Charles, General Manager Clyde Engineer-
ing Company, Granville.
Dare, Henry Harvey, M.E., M.Inst.C.E, Commissioner, Water
Conservation and Irrigation Commission, Union House,
George-street.
P 2) de Beuzeville, Wilfrid Alex. Watt, Forestry Assessor, Forest
Office, Tumut.
Delprat, Guillaume Daniel, c.B.z., ‘Keynsham,’ Mandeville
Crescent, ‘loorak, Victoria.
Denison, Sir Hugh Robert, x.B.z., 701 Culwulla Chambers,
Castlereagh-street.
Dick, James Adam. o.m.c., B.A. Syd., M.D., Ch.M., F.R.C.8. Edin.,
‘Catfoss,’ 59 Beluore Road, Randwick.
Elected
1906
1913
1928
1908
1924
1924
1923
1919
1924
1918
1916
1908
1896
1887
1921
1910
1909
1922
1927
1923
1920
1888
1879
1920
1905
1904
1925
1918
P3
P'6
P 2
PZ
Pay
Pil
(xii)
Dixson, William, ‘ Merridong,’ Gordon Road, Killara.
Doherty, William M., F.1c., F.c.s., Second Government:
Analyst, ‘ Jesmond,’ George-street, Marrickville.
Donegan, Henry Arthur James, A.s.7.c., Chemical Laboratory,
Department of Mines, Sydney.
Dun, William S., Paleeontologist, Department of Mines, Sydney.
(President 1918. )
Dupain, George Zephirin, a.a.c.1., F.c s., Dupain Institute of
Physical Education, Manning Building, Pitt and Hay
Streets, Sydney, p.r. ‘Symington,’ Parramatta Road,
Ashfield.
Durham, Joseph, 120 Belmore Road, Randwick.
Karl, John Campbell, p.se. Pn.p., Professor of Organic Chem-
istry in the University of Sydney.
Earp, T'he Hon. George Frederick, ¢.B.n., u.u.c., Australia
House, Carrington-street.
Eastaugh, Frederick Alldis, a.r.s.m., F.1.c., Assoc. Professor
in Chemistry, Assaying and Metallurgy in the University
of Sydney.
fElliott, Edward, c/o Reckitts’ (Oversea) Ltd., Bourke-street,
Redfern.
Enright, Walter J., B.a., High-street, West Maitland, N.S.W.
Esdaile, Edward William, 42 Hunter-street.
Fairfax, Geoffrey E., Hon. tu.p. (Toronto), B.a., S. M. Herald
Office, Hunter-street.
Faithfull, R. L., u.p., New York, u.R.0.P., u.s.A. Lond., c/o Iceton,,.
Faithfull and Maddocks, 25 O’Connell-street.
Farnsworth, Henry Gordon, ‘ Rothsay,’ 90 Alt-street, Ashfield.
Farrell, John, a.t.c., Syd., Riverina Flats, 265 Palmer-street,
Sydney.
Fawsitt, Charles Edward, p.sc., Ph,D., Professor of Chemistry
in the University of Sydney. (President 1919).
Ferguson, Andrew, 9 Martin Place, Sydney.
Finnemore, Horace, B.Sce., F.1.C., Lecturer in Pharmacy in the:
University of Sydney.
Fiaschi, Piero, 0.B.E., mu.p. (Columbia Univ.), p.p.s. (New York):
M.R.C.S. (Eng.), L.R.0.P. (Lond.), 178 Phillip-street.
Fisk, Ernest Thomas, Wireless House, 47 York-street.
Fitzhardinge, His Honour Judge G. H., m.a. ‘Red Hill,”
Pennant Hills.
{Foreman, Joseph, m.x.c.s. Eng. u.R.c.P. Edin., ‘The Astor,”
Macquarie-street.
Fortescue, Albert John, ‘Benambra,’ Loftus-street, Arncliffe.
Foy, Mark, c/o Hydro Office, 133a Pitt-street, Sydney.
Fraser, James, ©.M.G., M.Inst.C.E., Chief Commissioner for
Railways, Bridge-street.
Friend, Norman Bartlett, 48 Pile-street, Dulwich Hill.
Gallagher, James Laurence, m.a. Syd., ‘Akaroa,’ Hllesmere-
Avenue, Hunter’s Hill.
eer
Elected
1926 |
1921
1897
1922
1916
1922
1927
1923
1919
1880
1912
1892
1919
1916
1912
1887
1909
1916
1905
1913
1923
1918
1916
1914
1916
1919
1919
1884
1918
1921
11928
P5
P2
Ps
Pl
P8
P5
Pt
Pl
P2
Pi}
P2
(xiii. )
Gibson, Alexander James, M.E., M.Inst.c.E., M.I g.Aust., 906
Culwulla Chambers, Castlereagh-street, Sydney.
Godfrey, Gordon Hay, m.a.. B.Sc, Lecturer in Physics in the
Technical College, Sydney; p.r. 262 Johnston-street,
Annandale.
Gould, The Hon. Sir Albert John, K.B., v.p., ‘ Eynesbury,’
Edgecliff.
Grant, Robert, F.c.s., Department of Public Health, 98 Mac-
quarie-street.
Green, Victor Herbert, 19 Bligh-street.
Greig, William Arthur, Mines Department, Sydney.
Gunn, Reginald Montague Cairns, B.Sc., B.Sc.Agr., M.R.C.V.S.
Lecturer in Veterinary Auatomy and Surgery in the
University of Sydney.
Gurney, William Butler, Government Entomologist, Depart-
ment of Agriculture, Sydney.
Halligan, Gerald H., u.s., F.4.s., Uplands,”’ Station Street.
Pymble.
Hallmann, E. F., B.sc., 72 John-street, Petersham.
Halloran, Henry Ferdinand, t.s., 82 Pitt-street.
Hambridge, Frank, Adelaide Steamship Co. Chambers, Bridge-
street, Sydney.
Hamilton, Arthur Andrew, ‘The Ferns,’ 17 Thomas-st., Ashfield
Hamilton, Alexander G., ‘Tanandra,’ Hercules-st., Chatswood.
Hamlet, William M., F.1.c., F.c.s., Member of the Society of
Public Analysts ; ‘Glendowan,’ Glenbrook, Blue Mountains.
B.M.A. Building, 30 Elizabeth-st. (President 1899, 1908).
Hammond, Walter L., B.sc., High School, Bathurst.
Hardy, Victor Lawson, ‘Tiri Mona,’ 11a Gordon-av., Randwick
Harker, George, D.Sc., F.A.c.I., Chamber of Commerce Building,
35 William-street, Melbourne.
Harper, Leslie F., r.a.s., Geological Surveyor, Department of
Mines, Sydney.
Harrison, Travis Henry, Lecturer in Entomology and Botany
at the Hawkesbury Agricultural College, Richmond.
Hassan. Alex. Richard Roby, c/o W. Angliss & Co. Ppty. Ltd.,
64 West Smithfield, London, E.C.
Hay Dalrymple-, Richard T., t.s.; 45 Bay-street. Double Bay
Hector, Alex. Burnet, ‘‘ Druminard,”’ Greenwich-road, Green-
wich.
Henderson, James, ‘ Dunsfold,’ Clanalpine-street, Mosman.
Henriques, Frederick Lester, 208 Clarence-street.
Henry, Max, D5S.0., B.V.Se, M.R.C.V.s., ‘Coram Cottage,’ Essex-
street, Epping.
Henson, Joshua B., Assoc.M.Inst.C.E., 28 Barton-street, May-
field, Newcastle.
Hindmarsh, Percival, m.a., B.se. (Agr.), Teachers’ College, The
University, Sydney; p.r. ‘Lurnea,’ Canberra Avenue,
Greenwich.
Hindmarsh, William Lloyd, B.v.se, M.R.c.Vv.s., D.v.8., District
Veterinary Officer, Glenfield.
Hirst, George Walter Cansdell, B.Sc., Chief Mechanical Engi-
neer’s Office, Wilson Street, Redfern.
Elected,
1916
1924
1901
1905
1920
1919
VSM)
1919
1913
1920
1923
1927
1923
1922
1904
1925
1917
1918
1909
1924
1911
1924
1924
1887
1919
1896
P3
IPs2
P15
P3
(xiv.)
Hoggan, Henry James, A.M.1.M.@., A.M.1.E. (Aust.). Manchester
Unity Chambers, 160 Castlereagh-street; pr. ‘ Lincluden,”
Frederick-street, Rockdale.
Holme, Ernest Rudolph, 0.8.u., m.a., Professor of English:
Language in the University of Sydney.
Holt, Thomas 8., ‘Amalfi,’ Appian Way, Burwood.
Hooper, George, J.P., F.1.c. Syd., ‘Mycumbene,’ Nielsen Park,.
Vaucluse.
Hordern, Anthony, c.B.z., 12 Spring-street, Sydney.
Hoskins, Arthur Sidney, Eskroy Park, Bowenfels.
Hoskins, Cecil Harold, Windarra, Bowenfels.
Houston, Ralph Liddle, No. 1 Lincluden Gardens, Fairfax-rd.,.
Double Bay.
Hudson, G. Inglis, J.p., r.c.s., ‘Gudvangen,’ Arden-st., Coogee..
Hulle, Edward William, Commonwealth Bank of Australia.
Hynes, Harold John, B.sc., (Agr.), Walter and Bliza Hall Agri--
cultural Research Fellow, Biological Branch, Department:
of Agriculture, Sydney.
Inglis, William Keith, M.D., Ch.M., Lecturer in Pathology in:
the University of Sydney; p.r. 34 Wolseley-street,.
Drummoyne.
Ingram, William Wilson, u.c., M.D., cn.B., 185 Macquarie-st.,
Sydney.
Jacobs, Ernest Godfried, ‘Cambria,’ 106 Bland-street, Ashfield.
Jaquet, John Blockley, a.x.s.M., F.G.s., Chief Inspector of Mines,.
Department of Mines, Sydney.
Jenkins, Charles Adrian, B.£., B.Sc, 2 Ramsgate Avenue,
Bondi Beach.
Jenkins, Richard Ford, Engineer for Boring, Irrigation Com-:
mission, 6 Union-street, Mosman.
John, Morgan Jones, M.1I.Mech.&., A.M.1.E.E. Lond., M.1.E. Aust.,.
w.1.M. Aust., Atlas Building, 8 Spring-street; p.r. Olphert.
Avenue, Vaucluse.
Johnston, ''homas Harvey, M.A., D.Sc., F.L.S., C.M.Z.S., Professor
of Zoology in the University of Adelaide.
Jones, Leo Joseph, Geological Surveyor, Department of Mines,.
Sydney.
Julius, George A., Sir, Kt., B.8c., M.E., M.I.Mech.E., Culwulla:
Chambers, Castlereagh-street, Sydney.
Kenner, James, Ph. D., D.Sc, F.R.S., Professor of Technological,
Chemistry in the University of Manchester.
Kenny, Edward Joseph, Field Assistant, Department of Mines,
Sydney; p.r. 45 Robert-street, Marrickville.
Kent, Harry C., M.A., F.R.1.B.A., Dibbs’ Chambers, 58 Pitt-st..
Kesteven, Hereward Leighton, M.D., Ch.M., D.Sc., Bulladelah,,.
New South Wales.
King, Kelso, 14 Martin Place.
Elected
1923
1920
1919
1877
1924:
1920
1916
1909
1883
1906
1924
1927 |
1884
1923
1921
1903
1919
1906
1891
1880
1922
1927
1916
1909
1924,
1880
P2
P9
(xv.)
Kinghorn, James Roy, Australian Museum, Sydney.
Kirchner, William John, B.sc., “ Wanawong,” ‘I hornleigh-road,,
Beecroft.
| Kirk, Robert Newby, 25 O’Connell-street
Knox, Edward W., ‘Rona,’ Bellevue Hill, Double Bay.
Leech, ‘Thomas David James, B.sc., Syd., ‘Orontes,’ Clarke-st.,
Granville.
Le Souef, Albert Sherbourne, Taronga Park, Mosman.
L’Estrange, Walter William, 7 Church-street, Ashfield.
Leverrier, Frank, B.A., B.Sc, K.c., Wentworth Road, Vaucluse.
“ingen, J. T., m.a. Cantab., x.c., e/¢c Union Club, Bligh-st.
Loney, Charles Augustus Luxton, M.Am.Soc.Refr.E., Equitable
Building, George-street.
Love, David Horace, Beauchamp Avenue, Chatswood.
Love, William Henry, Bsc, ‘‘Lumeah,’ 9 Miller-street,
Haberfield.
MacCormick, Sir Alexander, K.c.M.G., M.D., C.M. Hdin., M.R.C.S.
Eng., 185 Macquarie-street.
Mackay, Iven Giffard. c.u.a., D.s.o., B.A., Student Adviser and
Secretary of Appointments Board, The University, Svdney.
McDonald, Alexander Hugh Earle, Superintendent of Agri-
culture, Department of Agriculture, Sydney.
McDonald, Robert, J.p., u.s., Pastoral Chambers, O’Connell-st;
p.r. ‘ Lowlands,’ William-street, Double Bay.
McGeachie, Duncan, M.1.M.E,, M.1.E, (Aust.), u.1.m.m. (Aust.),
‘Craig Royston,’ Toronto, Lake Macquarie.
McIntosh, Arthur Marshall, ‘Moy Lodge,’ Hill-st., Roseville.
McKay, R. T., L.S., M.Inst.C.E., Commissioner, Sydney Harbour
Trust, Circular Quay.
McKinney, Hugh Giffin, m.z., Roy. Univ. Irel., M.Inst.C.E.,
Sydney Safe Deposit, Paling’s Buildings, Ash-street.
McLuckie, John, M.a.; B.sc., (Glasgow), D.Sc.. (Syd.), Assistant-
Professor of Botany in the University of Sydney.
McMaster, Frederick Duncan, ‘“‘ Dalkeith,’’ Cassilis.
McQuiggin, Harold G., u.B., ch.m., B.Sc, Lecturer and Demon-
strator in Physiology in the University of Sydney; p.r..
‘ Berolyn,’ Beaufort-street, Croydon.
Madsen, John Percival Vissing, D.Sc., B.E., Professor of Elec-
trical Engineering in the University of Sydney.
Mance, Frederick Stapleton. Under Secretary for Mines, Mines.
Department, Sydney; p.r. ‘ Binbah,’ Lucretia Avenue,
Longueville.
P 1| Manfred, Edmund C., Montague-street, Goulburn.
‘Elected.
1920
1920
1908
1914
1926
1912
1922
1928
1926
1879
1922
1924
1924,
1879
1915
1923
1893
1917
1924
1891
1920
Pl
P13
P2
P4
P2
(xvi.)
Mann, Cecil William.
Mann, James Elliott Furneaux, Barrister at Law, c/o H.
Southerden, Esq.. Box 1646 J.J., G.P.O., Sydney.
Marshall, Frank, c.m.c., B.D.s., 151 Macquarie-street.
Martin, A. H., Technical College, Sydney.
Mathews, Hamilton Bartlett, B.a. Syd., Surveyor General of
N.S.W., Department of Lands, Sydney.
Meldrum, Henry John, B.a., 8.sc. ‘ Craig Roy,’ Sydney Road,
Manly.
Mills, Arthur Edward, m.B., cn.m., Dean of the Faculty of
Medicine, Professor,of Medicine in the University of
Sydney ; p.r. 143 Macquarie-street.
Mitchell, Louis Ivan, Ph.D., Colonial Sugar Refining Co.,
Pyrmont. :
Mitchell, Ernest Marklow, 106 Harrow Road, Rockdale
Moore, Frederick H., Union Club, Sydney.
Morrison, Frank Richard, 4.a.c.1., F.c.s., Assistant Chemist,
Technological Museum, Sydney; p.r. Brae-st., Waverley.
Morrison, Malcolm, Department of Mines, Sydney.
Mullens, Arthur Launcelot, 65 Woodside Avenue, Strathfield.
Mullins, John Lane, u.t.c., M.a. Syd., ‘ Killountan,’ Double
Bay.
Murphy, R. K., Dr. Ing., Chem. Eng., Lecturer in Chemistry
Technical College, Sydney.
Murray, Jack Keith, B.A., B.sc. (Agr.), Principal, Queensland
Agricultural College, Gatton, Queensland.
Nangle, James, 0.B.E., F.R.A.S., Superintendent of Technical
Education, The ‘Technical College, Sydney; Government
Astronomer, The Observatory, Sydney. (President 1920.,
Vice-President.
Nash, Norman C., ‘Ruanora,’ King’s Road, Vaucluse.
Nickoll, Harvey, L.8.c.P., L.R.C.s., Barham, via Mudgee, N.S.W.
tNoble, Edward George, L.s., 8 Louisa Road, Balmain.
Noble, Robert Jackson, M.Se., B.Sc.Agr., Ph.D., Agricultural
Museum, George-street, North; p.r. ‘ Lyndon,’ Carrington- |
street, Homebush.
f{Old, Richard, ‘ Waverton,’ Bay Road, North Sydney.
Olding, George Henry, *‘ Werriwee,” Wright's Road, Drum-
moyne.
Ollé, A. D., F.c.s., ‘Kareema,’ Charlotte-street, Ashfield.
Ormsby, Irwin, ‘Caleula,’ Allison Road, Randwick.
Osborn, A. F., Assoc.M.Inst.C.E., Water Supply Branch, Sydney;
p.r. ‘ Waugoola,’ Fern-street. Pymble.
Osborn, Theodore George Bentley, D.sc., F.LS., Professor of
Botany in the University of Sydney.
Osborne, George Davenport, D.sc. Lecturer and Demonstrator
in Geology in the University of Sydney; p.r. ‘Belle-Vue,’
Kembla-st., Arncliffe.
‘Elected
1880 |
1921
1928
1920
1909
1879
1881
1919
1917
1896
1921
1918
1927
1918
1893
1927
1922
1919
1909
1928
1920
1924
1928
11884
1895
1927
(1925
1907
(xvil.)
| Palmer, Joseph, 96 Pitt-st.; p.r. Kenneth-st., Willoughby.
Parkes, Varney, Conjola, South Coast.
Parsons, Stanley William Enos, Analyst and Inspector,
N.S.W. Explosive Department, p.r. Shepherd Road, Artar-
mon.
P 49| Penfold, Arthur Ramon, F.c.s., Curator and Economic Chemist,
Technological Museum, Harris-street, Ultimo.
P 2| Pigot, Rev. Edward F., s.J., B.A., M.B. Dub., Director of the
Seismological Observatory, St. Ignatius’College, Riverview.
P 8| Pittman, Edward F., Assoc.R.S.M. L.S., ‘The Oaks,’ Park-street,
South Yarra, Melbourne.
Poate, Frederick, F.R.A.S., L.S., ‘ Clanfield,’ 50 Penkivil-street,
Bondi.
Poate, Hugh Raymond Guy, m.B., ch. M. Syd., F.R.C.8. Eng.,
L.R.c.P. Lond., 225 Macquarie-street.
Poole, William, m.z., (Civil, Min. and Met.) Syd., mM. Inst. C.E.,
M.I.M.M., M.I.E., Aust., M.Am.1.M.E., M. Aust. I. M.M., L.S.,
906 Culwulla Chambers, Castlereagh-street. President.
(Member from 1891 to 1904.)
Pope, Roland James, B.a., Syd., M.D., Ch.M., F.R.CS.. EHdin.,
185 Macquarie-street.
P2| Powell, Charles Wilfrid Roberts, a.1.c., c/o Colonial Sugar
Refining Co., O’Connell-street.
‘Powell, John, 17 Thurlow-street, Redfern.
Price, William Lindsay, B.E.,B.Sc.,“ Malola,” Smith-road,
Artarmon.
Priestley, Henry, mM.D., ch. M., B.Sc, Associate-Professor of
Physiology in the University of Sydney.
Purser, Cecil, B.A., M.B., Chm. Syd., 185 Macquarie-street.
Radcliffe-Brown, Alfred Reginald, m.a., Cantab., m.a., Adel.,
F.R.A.I., Cantab., Professor of Anthropology in the Uni-
versity of Sydney.
Raggatt, Harold George, B.sc., “‘ Meru,” Epping-av., Epping.
P 3| Ranclaud, Archibald Boscawen Boyd, B.sc., B.E., Lecturer in
Physics, Teachers’ College, The University, Sydney.
Reid, David, ‘ Holmsdale,’ Pymble.
Reidy, Eugene Nicholas, a.s.t.c., Analyst, Department of
Mines, Sydney.
Richardson, John James, A.M.1.E.E. Lond., ‘ Kurrawyba,’
Upper Spit Road, Mosman.
Robertson, James R. M., m.p., C.M., F.R.G.S., F.G.S., ‘Vanduara,’
Ellamang Avenue, Kirribilli.
Ross, Allan Clunies, B.Sc, 15 Castlereagh-street, Sydney.
(Member from 1915 to 1924.)
P 1| Ross, Chisholm, u.p. Syd., M.B., Ch.M., Hdin., 225 Macquarie-st.
Ross, Herbert E., Equitable Building, George-street.
Ross, Ian Clunies, D.V.Sce., ‘‘ Lorne,” The Grove, Woollahra.
Roughley, Theodore Cleveland, Technological Museum,
Sydney.
Ryder, Charles Dudley, D. Eng. (Vienna), Assoc.I.R.8.M,. (L.),
Ass.A.C.1., F.C.8., (L.j, Public Analyst (by appoint.), 59
Patterson-street; Concord.
Elected
1922 |
1926
1920
1920
TOUS
1923
1918
1924
1927
1917
1900
1922
1919
1921
1917
1916
1921
1914
1920
1913
1900
1909
1916
1927
1919
1920
1918
1901
1919
1920
Pil
Pl
Pt
Pt
Po
(xviii. )
Sandy, Harold Arthur Montague, 326 George-street.
Saunderson, William, B.Sc. Dun,, F.C.S., Licentiate, College of-
Preceptors England, c/o Imperial Service Club, 12 O’Con-
nell-street, Sydnev.
Sawyer, Basil, B.s., ‘Birri Birra,’ The Crescent, Vaucluse.
Scammell, Rupert Boswood, B.sc., Syd., 18 Middle Head Road,
Mosman.
Sear, Walter George Lane, c/o J. Kitchen & Sons, Ingles-st.,.
Port Melbourne.
Seddon, Herbert Robert, p.v.sc,, Director, Veterinary Research-
Station, Glenfield.
Sevier, Harry Brown, c/o Lewis Berger and Sons (Aust.) Ltd.,
Cathcart House, Castlereagh-street.
Shelton, James Peel, msc, B.Sc, Agr., Department of Agri--
culture, Canberra. .
Shearsby, Alfred James, 152 Bland-street, Haberfield.
Sibley, Samuel Edward, Mount-street, Coogee.
tSimpson, R.C., Lecturer in Electrical Engineering, Technical
College, Sydney.
Smith, Thomas Hodge, Australian Museum, Sydney.
Southee, Ethelbert Ambrook, 0.B.8., M.A., B.Sc, Principal,
Hawkesbury Agricultural College, Richmond, N.S.W.
Spencer-Watts, Arthur, ‘Araboonoo,’ Glebe-street, Randwick.
Spruson, Wilfred Joseph, Daily Telegraph Building, King-st..
Stephen, Alfred Ernest, F.c.s., Box 1197 H.H.G.P.O., Sydney...
Stephen, Henry Montague, B.a., LL.B., c/o Messrs. Maxwell
and Boyd, 17 O’Connell-street.
Stephens, Frederick G. N., F.R.c.s., M.B., Ch.M., Captain Piper’s
Koad and New South Head Road, Vaucluse.
Stephens, John Gower, m.B., Royal Prince Alfred Hospital,
Camperdown.
Stewart, Alex. Hay, B.z., ‘ Yunah,’ 22 Murray-street, Croydon
Stewart, J. Douglas, B.v.sc., M.R.c.V.s., Professor of Veterinary
Science in the University of Sydney ; p.r. ‘ Berelle,’ Home-
bush Road, Strathfield. (President 1927.) Vice-President...
Stokes, Edward Sutherland, m.s. Syd., ¥.z.c.p. Irel., Medical
Officer, Metropolitan Board of Water Supply and Sewerage,
341 Pitt-street.
Stone, W.G., Assistant Analyst, Department of Mines, Sydney.
Stump, Claude Witherington, M.D., D.Sc., Assoc.-Professor of
Auatomy in the University of Sydney ; p.r. 40 Shirley-rd..
Wollstonecraft.
Stroud, Sydney Hartnett, F.1.C., Ph.c., c/o Elliott Bros., Ltd.,
Terry-street, Rozelle.
| Sulman, Sir John, Kt., Warrung-st., McMahon’s Point, North
Sydney.
Sundstrom, Carl Gustaf, c/o Federal Match Co., Park Road,
Alexandria.
P 12\tSussmilch, C. A., F.a.s., F.S.T.c., A.M.1I.E. (Aust.), Principal of
the East Sydney Technical College, and Assistant Super--
intendent of Technical Education. (President 1922.
Hon. Secretary. .
tSutherland, George Fife, a.R.c.sc., Lond., Assistant-Professor -
in Mechanical Engineering, in the University of Sydney.
Sutton, Harvey, 0.B.£.,M.D., D.P.H. Velb., B.Sc. Oxon., ‘ Lynton,”
Kent Road, Rose Bay.
Elected
1919
1916
1890
1921
1892
1903
1924.
1919
1910
1910
1879
~~
bo co
P 4,
P5
(xa)
Swain, Herbert John, B.a. Cantab., B.sc, B.e. Syd., Lecturer in
Mechanical Engineering, ‘echnical College, Sydney.
Tannahill, Robert William, B.Sc. Syd., ‘‘ Eastwell,” 40 Camma--
ray Avenue, North Svdney.
Taylor, Harold B., p.sc., Kenneth-street, Longueville.
Taylor, John Kingsley, Hawkesbury Agricultural College,.
Richmond; p.r. 16 Ferrier-street, Rockdale.
tTaylor, John M., m.a., LL.B. Syd., ‘Woonona,’ 43 East Crescent-
street, McMahon’s Point, North Sydney.
Taylor, Thomas Griffith, B.a., D.s-., B.8.. Professor of Geography
in the University of Chicago.
Teece, R., F.1.A., F.F.A., Wolseley Road, Point Piper.
Thomas, David, B.E., Mim.mM, FG.S. 15 Clifton Avenue;
Burwood.
Thomas, John, u.s., ‘Remeura,’ Pine and Harrow Roads,
Auburn.
Thompson, Herbert William, ‘ Marathon,’ Francis-st.,Randwick
Thompson, Joseph, M.a., LL.B., Vickery’s Chambers, 82 Pitt-st..
Thorne, Harold Henry, B.a. Cantab., B.sc. Syd., Lecturer in
Mathematics in the University of Sydney; p.r. Rutledge-st.,
Eastwood.
Tillyard, Robin John, M.A., D.Sc. F.8.S., F.L.S., F.E.S., Chief:
Commonwealth Entomologist, Canberra, F.c.T.
Timcke, Edward Waldemar, Meteorologist, Weather Bureau,
Sydney.
Tindale, Harold, Works Engineer, c/o Australian Gas-Light
Co., Mortlake.
Toppin, Richmond Douglas, a.1.c., Parke Davis & Co., Rose-
bery.
Trebeck, P. C., ‘‘ Boera,’” Queen-street, Bowral.
Tye, Cyrus Willmott Oberon. Under Secretary for Public
Works, Public Works Dept., Sydney; p.r. 19 Muston-st.,.
Mosman.
Valder, George, J.p., 43 Albert-street, Mosman.
Vicars, James, m.u.. Memb. Intern. Assoc. Testing Materials;,
Memb. B. 58. Guild; Challis House, Martin Place.
Vicars, Robert, Marrickville Woollen Mills, Marrickville.
Vickery, George B., 9th Floor, Barrack House, Barrack-street..
Sydney.
Vonwiller, Oscar U., B.sSc., F.tnst.P., Professor of Physics in the:
University of Sydney. Hon. Secretary.
Wade, Rev. Robert Thompson, u.a., Headfort School, Killara.
Waley, Robert George Kinloch, 63 Pitt-street.
Walker, Charles, ‘Lynwood,’ Terry Road, Ryde.
Walker, Harold Hutchison, Vickery’s Chambers, 82 Pitt-st..
Walker, H. O., ‘ Moora,’ Crown-street, Granville.
‘Elected
1919| Pl
11903
1901
1918
1913 | P 4
1922
11921
1924,
11919
1919|P3
“1919
1876
1910
1911 | Pl
11920 |P 22
1920; Pl
1921
1881
1922
11909 | P3
11918
1892 | P2
11923
1927
(1921
1920
(xx.)
Walkom, Arthur Bache, p.sc., Macleay House, 16 College-st.
Walsh, Fred.,, 3.P., Consul-General for Honduras in Australia
and New Zealand; For. Memb. Inst. Patent Agents, Lon-
don; Patent Attorney Regd. U.S.A.; Memb. Patent Law
Assoc., Washington; Regd. Patent Attorn. Comm. of Aust.;
Memb. Patent Attorney Exam. Board Aust.; 4th Floor,
Barrack House, Barrack-street, Sydney ; p.r. ‘Walsholme,’
Centennial Park, Sydney.
Walton, R. H., rc.s., ‘Flinders,’ Martin’s Avenue, Bondi.
Ward, Edward Naunton, Curator of the Botanic Gardens, Syd.
Wardlaw, Hy. Sloane Halcro, D.sv. Syd., Lecturer and Demon-
strator in Physiology in the University of Sydney.
Wark, Blair Anderson, v.c., D.S.0., M.1.Q.¢., ¢/o hompson and
Wark, T. & G. Building, Elizabeth-street; p.r. ‘ Braeside,’
Zeta-street, Lane Cove, Sydney.
{Waterhouse, G. Athol, p.sc, B.E., F.F.S., Curator of the
Division of Economic Entomology, Canberra.
Waterhouse, Leslie Vickery, B.r. Syd., 6th Floor, Wingello
House, Angel Place, Sydney.
Waterhouse, Lionel Lawry, B.r. Syd., Lecturer and Demon-
strator in Geology in the University of Sydney.
Waterhouse, Walter L., M.C., B.Sc.Agr., DI.C., ‘Hazelmere,’
Chelmsford Avenue, Roseville.
Watkin-Brown, Willie Thomas, r.r.u.s., Lucasville Road,
Glenbrook.
Watkins, John Leo, B.A. Cantab., m.a. Syd., University Club,
Castlereagh-street ; p.r. 169 Avoca-street, Randwick.
Watson, James Frederick, m.B., ch.m., ‘Midhurst,’ Woollahra.
Watt, Robert Dickie, m.a., B.sce., Professor of Agriculture in
the University of Sydney. (President, 1925). Vice-
President.
Welch, Marcus Baldwin, B.sc., A.1.c., Economic Botanist, T'ech-
nological Museum.
Wellish, Edward Montague, m.a., Associate-Professor in Math-
ematics in the University of Sydney.
Wenholz, Harold, Director of Plant Breeding, Department
of Agriculture, Sydney.
tWesley, W. H., London.
Whibley, Harry Clement, 39 Moore-street, Leichhardt.
{White, Charles Josiah, B.sc, Lecturer in Chemistry, Teacher’s
College.
White, Edmond Aunger, M.A.I.M.E., c/o Electrolytic Refining
and Smelting Co. of Australia Ltd., Port Kembla, N.S.W.
White, Harold Pogson, F.c.8., Assayer and Analyst, Depart-
ment of Mines; p.r. ‘Quantox,’ Park Road, Auburn.
Whitehouse, Frank, B.v.se, (Syd.) ‘ Dane Bank,’ Albyn Road,
Strathfield.
Wilkinson, Herbert oe B.A., M.B., Ch.M., Senior Lecturer
and Demonstrator in Anatomy in the University of Sydney,
p.v. 53 Liverpool Road, Summer Hill.
Willan, Thomas Lindsay, B.Sc, c/o Alluvial Tin Malaya Ltd.,
Ho Hong Bank Bld., Market and Beach Streets, Penang,
_ Straits Settlements.
Williams, Harry, a.1.c.,c/o Whiddon Bros.’ Rosebery Lanolines
Pty. Ltd., Arlington Mills, Botany.
(xx1.)
Elected
1924 Williams, William John, 18 Bridge-street, Sydney.
1923 Wilson, Stanley Hric, ‘Chatham,’ James-street, Manly.
1891 Wood, Percy Moore, u.R.c.p. Lond., M.R.c.s. Hng., ‘ Redcliffe,”
Liverpool Road, Ashfield.
1906 |P 11) Woolnough, Walter George, D.Sc, F.a.s., ‘Callabonua,’ Park
Avenue, Gordon. (President, 1926.) Vice-President.
1916 Wright, George, c/o Farmer & Company, Pitt-street.
1917 Wright, Gilbert, Lecturer and Demonstrator in Agricultural,
Chemistry in the University of Sydney.
1921 Yates, Guy Carrington, 184 Sussex-street.
Honorary MEMBERS.
Limited to Twenty.
M.—Recipients of the Clarke Medal.
1918 Chilton, Charles, m.A., D.Sc, M.B.,¢.M., etc., Professor of Biology,
Canterbury College, Christchurch, N.Z.
1914 Hill, James P., D.sc., F.R.S., Professor of Zoology, University
College, London.
1908 Kennedy, Sir Alex. B. W., Kt., uu.D., D. Eng., F.R.S., Emeritus
Professor of Engineering in University College, London,
17 Victoria-street, Westminster, London S.W.
1915 Maitland, Andrew Gibb, F.a.s., Government Geologist of
Western Australia, ‘ Bon Accord,’ 2 Charles-street, South.
Perth, W.A.
1912 Martin, C. J., c.M.G., D.Sc., F.R.S., Director of the Lister Institute
of Preventive Medicine, Chelsea Gardens, Chelsea Bridge
Road, London, S.W. 1.
1894} M | Spencer, Sir W. Baldwin, k.c.M.G., M.A., D.Sc., F.R.S., Emeritus
Professor of Biology in the University of Melbourne,
National Museum, Melbourne.
1928 Smith, Grafton Elliott, M.a., M.D., F.R.S., F.R.c.P., Professor of
Anatomy in the University College, London.
1900 | M | Thiselton-Dyer, Sir William Turner, K.c.M.G., C.I.E., M.A., LL.D.,
Se. D., F-R.S., The Ferns, Witcombe, Gloucester, England.
1915 Thomson, Sir J. J., 0.mM., D.Sc, F.R.S., Nobel Laureate, Master
of Trinity College, Cambridge, England.
1921 Threlfall, Sir Richard, c.B.u., M.a., F.R.S., lately Professor of
Physics in the University of Sydney, ‘Oakhurst, Church
Road, Edgbaston, Birmingham, England.
1922 Wilson, James T., .8., ch.m. Edin., F.R.S., Professor of Anatomy
in the University of Cambridge, England. 81 Grange
Road, Cambridge, England.
OBITUARY 1928-29.
Ordinary Members.
Elected, Elected.
1904 Cambage, Richard Hind 1887 MacCuiloch, Stanhope H.
1876 Cape, Alfred John 1897 Russell, Harry Ambrose
1876 Darley, Cecil West 19138 Scammell, William Joseph
1922 Fleming, Edward Patrick 1899 ‘Teece, Richard
1881 Knibbs, George Handley 1917 Willington, William Thomas.
(XXL. )
AWARDS OF 'THE CLARKE MEDAL.
Established in memory of
‘The Revd. WILLIAM BRANWHITE CLARKE, m.A., F.R.S., F.G.S., etc.
Vice-President from 1866 to 1878.
To be awarded from time to time for meritorious contributions to the
‘Geology, Mineralogy, or Natural History of Australia. The prefix *
indicates the decease of the recipient.
Awarded
1878 *Professor Sir Richard Owen. k.c.B., F.R.S.
1879 *George Bentham, c.M.G., F.R.S.
1880 *Professor Thos. Huxley, F.R.s.
1881 *Professor F. M’Coy, F.R.s., F.G.S.
1882 *Professor James Dwight Dana, LL.D.
1883 *Baron Ferdinand von Mueller, K.c.M.G., M.D., Ph.D., F.R.S., F.L.S.
1884 *Alfred R. C. Selwyn, LL.D., F.R.S., F.G.S.
1885 *Sir Joseph Dalton Hooker, 0.M., @.c.s8.1.,C.B., M.D.,D.C.L., LL.D.,F.R.S.
1886 *Professor L. G. De Koninck, m.p.
1887 *Sir James Hector, K.c.M.G., M.D, F.R.S.
‘1888 *Rev. Julian E. Tenison-Woods, F.G.S., F.L.S.
1889 *Robert Lewis John Ellery, F.R.s., F.R.A.S.
‘1890 *George Bennett, m.D., F.R.c.s. Hng., F.L.S., F.Z.S.
1891 *Captain Frederick Wollaston Hutton, F.R.s8., F.G.S.
1892. = Sir William Turner Thiselton Dyer, k.c.M.G.,C.I.E.,M.A., LL.D., Sc, D.,
F.R.S., F.L.S., late Director, Royal Gardens, Kew.
1893 *Professor Ralph Tate, F..L.s., F.a.s.
1895 *Robert Logan Jack, LL.D., F.G.S., F.R.G.S.
1895 *Robert Etheridge, Jnr.
1896 *The Hon. Augustus Charles Gregory, ¢.M.G., F.R.G.S.
1900 *Sir John Murray, K.C.B., LL.D., Se. D., F.R.S.
1901 *Edward John Eyre.
1902 *F. Manson Bailey, c.M.a.. F.L.S.
1908 *Alfred William Howitt, D.sc., F.G.S.
1907 Walter Howchin, r.a.s., University of Adelaide.
1909 Dr. Walter E. Roth, B.a., Pomeroon River, British Guiana, South
America.
1912 *W. H. Twelvetrees, F.a.s.
1914 A. Smith Woodward, tu.D., F.R.s., Keeper of Geology, British
Museum (Natural History) London.
1915 *Professor W. A. Haswell, M.A., D.Sc., F.R.S.
1917 += Professor Sir Edgeworth David, K.B.E., ¢.M.G., D.S.0., B.A., D.Se.,
F.R.S., F.G s., The University, Sydney.
1918 Leonard Rodway, c.m.a., Honorary Government Botanist, Hobart,
Tasmania.
1920 *Joseph Edmund Carne, F.«.s.
1921 *Joseph James Fletcher, M.A., B.Sc.,
1922 Richard Thomas Baker, The Crescent, Cheltenham.
1923 Sir W. Baldwin -Spencer, K.c.M.G., M.A., D.Sc. F.B.S., National
* Museum, Melbourne.
1924 *Joseph Henry Maiden, 1.s.0., F.R.S., F.L.S., J.P.
1925 *Charles Hedley, F.u.s.
1927 Andrew Gibb Maitland, r.a.s., “Bon Accord,’ Melville Place,
South Perth.
1928 Ernest C. Andrews, B.A., F.a.S., Government Geologist, Depart-
of Mines, Sydney.
(xxi)
AWARDS OF THE SOCIETY’S MEDAL AND MONEY PRIZE.
Money Prize of £25.
Awarded,
1882
1882
1884
1886
1887
1888
1889
1889
1891
1892
1894
1894.
1895
1896
John Fraser, B.a., West Maitland, for paper entitled ‘The Aborigines
of New South Wales.’
Andrew Ross, m.p., Molong, for paper entitled ‘Influence of the
Australian climate and pastures upon the growth of wool.’
The Society’s Bronze Medal and £25.
W. E. Abbott, Wingen, for paper entitled ‘ Water supply in the
Interior of New South Wales.’
S. H. Cox, F.a.s., F.c.s., Sydney, for paper entitled ‘The Tin deposits
of New South Wales.’
Jonathan Seaver, ¥F.a.s., Sydney, for paper entitled ‘Origin and
mode of occurrence of gold-bearing veins and of the associated
Minerals.’
Rev. J. E. Tenison- Woods, F.G.s., F.L.s., Sydney, for paper entitled
‘The Anatomy and Life-history of Mollusca peculiar to
Australia.’
Thomas Whitelegge, F.R.M.s., Sydney, for paper entitled ‘ List of
the Marine and Fresh-water Invertebrate Fauna of Port
Jackson and Neighbourhood.’
Rev. John Mathew, m.a., Coburg, Victoria, for paper entitled
‘The Australian Aborigines.’
Rev. J. Milne Curran, F.a.s., Sydney, for paper entitled ‘The Micro-
scopic Structure of Australian Rocks.’
Alexander G. Hamilton, Public School, Mount Kembla, for paper
entitled ‘The effect which settlement in Australia has pro-
duced upon Indigenous Vegetation.’ |
J. V. De Coque, Sydney, for paper entitled the ‘ Timbers of New
South Wales.’
R. H. Mathews, t.s., Parramatta, for paper entitled ‘The Abori-
ginal Rock Carvings and Paintings in New South Wales.’
C. J. Martin, p.sc., m.B., F.R.S., Sydney, for paper entitled ‘'Il'he
physiological action of the venom of the Australian black
snake (Pseudechis porphyriacus).’
Rev. J. Milne Curran, Sydney, for paper entitled ‘The occurrence
of Precious Stones in New South Wales, with a description of
the Deposits in which they are found.’
i
7, 4
=e
= 9 ac ON eee ea Ee
0'V etl CUS TI oS Zh = |) O8Z0 0a) 2 = * SN eee
LY oT SOOT BS OV = | "6c60 0) SSO NSUUlE eS Veal ooN\
acy. aaa | S805 1] «£57— |~ 82900 | -V -ON PElUTEhY se
SLY Ja LOE cad b= 29960 | -¢ ON UUlETShY 1s97M
Sp rT CoUG T= 657 = 4) 2296107) 9 °C ONS EES area
0'¢ cl SEOs Lil oot Sue CO9GI0N)| «at ON Bellershye ea
“STOA "STOA
{oyooTy att sD gly ‘poururexd sajdures
YOL UL AyTIqnyos
E—6 June, 1928.
66 A. R. PENFOLD.
On fractional distillation, at 1-2 mm., of West Australian
samples nos. 1 and 2, and East Indian no. 1, the following
results were obtained :—
W.A. Owl, No. 1. 400 c.c. crude oil.
“a: : 15 20 20 M.Pt. of
Boiling Point. Volume. di4 i Ue allophanate
110-140° 46c.c. 0.9388 —84° 14970 157° 14%
140-145° 62. ec, 0.9595 —7.2° 1.5081 153° 17%
1454-1464° 40 cc. 0.9627 —7.6° 1.5051 153° 123%
1464-147° 142c.c. 0.9627 —8.0° 1.5058 142-145° 10%
Yield of
Sere
* 150-156° 40c.c. 0.9750 — 10°. 1.5089 — 3%
156-158° 20 ¢.c. 0.977 —J10:8~ arog — a
Viscous residue LDS,
W.A. Owl Sample No. 2. 100 c.c.
104-130° (3 mm.) 20 ¢.e. “093872 — 4.55° 1.4992
130-147° (3 mm.) 17 ce; = 9582 — 4.5° E5031
148-154° (3 mm.) D3 @.c. + 0.9691 — 3.8° 1.5068
Residue 1.5142
The East Indian oil distilled under similar conditions
gave the following results, viz. :—
No. 1 sample, 200 c.c.
135-141° (1-2mm.) 35¢.. 0.9690 — 15.9° 1.5040
141-145° (1-2mm.) 150¢.c. 0.9785 — 17.2° 1.5064
Residue 15;¢.¢; 50.999 — 24° 1.5150
The foregoing results clearly show that there exists a
considerable difference in the alcoholic components of the
West Australian and East Indian oils.
The three samples of oil referred to above were then
treated with equal weights of phthalic anhydride and
benzene on a boiling water-bath, using 100 gram lots in
each case. All the samples thus treated returned 70% of
alcoholic constituents when isolated from the phthalic acid
esters. Combination was effected after one hour’s treat-
WESTERN AUSTRALIAN SANDALWOOD OIL. 67
ment, although two hours’ heating was given in each ease.
The following results were obtained when the regenerated
alcohols were subjected to fractional distillation under
reduced pressure.
W.A. Oil, No. 1.
Boiling Point. Volume. diz an n> a fa
130-146° (1-2mm.) 10 ¢.c. 0.9622 —5.5° 1.5041
146-149° s 10 ¢.c. 0.9608 —6.1° 1.5050
150-154° =, «3S 40 ee. 0.9602 —7.6° 1.5058
Duplicate result.
Below 151°(3 mm.) 6c.¢. 0.9615 —6.0° 1.5050
254-155°:(3 mm. )- 40 ¢.¢. 0.9622 —8.5° 1.5067 151°
W.A. Oil, No. 2.
135-154° (3mm.) 14¢.c. 0.9865 Inactive 1.5060 162°
154-156° (3mm.) 50c.c. 0.9660 —3° 1.5068 152°
East Indian Oil, No. 1.
140-150° (8mm.) 8c.c. 0.9793 — 14.4° 1.5055
150-155° (1mm.) 18¢.¢c. 0.9774 —19.6° 1.5064 162-163°
Oxidation of Crude Oils.
(a) The chemists of the Imperial Institute (Bulletin,
Imperial Inst. 1920, 18, 163) found that the
Australian oil yielded only 8% santalenic acid as
against 20% obtained from the East Indian oil
on oxidation with potassium permanganate, using
Chapman’s process. (The particular sample of
oil examined contained only 76-78% sesquiterpene
alcohols.) The author repeated this work and
obtained similar results, but the amount of tarry
products formed with the Australian oil made it
very difficult to estimate and purify the santalenic
acid. A modified process of oxidation with
potassium permanganate was adopted, which not
68 A. R. PENFOLD.
only gave considerable increased yields of san-
talenic acid, but the latter was obtained free of
tarry products upon treatment of the West
Australian oil. The process was as follows:—
00-grams of powdered potassium permanganate
(70-grams required for the Australian oil) are
placed in a winchester with 700 ¢.c. iced water,
300-grams ice and 20 «ec. of the Sandalwood oil
and the mixture transferred quickly to a shaking
machine when the oxidation is completed within
a few minutes. The following average results:
were thus obtained :—
20 c.c. of the East Indian oil yielded 6-7 grams
of crude santalenic acid,
20 c.c. of the West Australian oil gave 2.5 to.
3.9 grams do.
Computing from this basis, the Australian oil is considered
to contain about 40-45% of Santalols. The santalenic acid
obtained in every instance when purified from ethyl alcohol
or acetone and water, melted sharply at 76°-76.5°.
(b) The Australian oil when oxidised with chromic
acid in glacial acetic acid solution alongside of
the Hast Indian oil yielded small quantities of
aldehyde, the semicarbazone of which melted at
230°, thus affording confirmation of the presence:
of santalol.
Preparation of the Allophanates.
A study is being made of the action of cyanic acid upon
the various alcohols with a view to their definite identifi-
cation. The work is not yet completed, but sufficient data
is available to show that the W.A. alcohols are a mixture
of isomeric sesquiterpene alcohols with the santalols. The
Kast Indian alcohols yielded a fine crystalline derivative
melting at 162-163°. The Australian oil yielded a mixture
WESTERN AUSTRALIAN SANDALWOOD OIL. 69
from which on repeated fractional crystallisation a definite
fraction of melting point 162° was obtained, identical with
santalol allophanate. A mixed melting point showed no
depression. The remaining fractions varied in melting
point from 148° to 152°, being probably mixtures with
gantalol allophanate of M.Pt. 162-163°. The laevo-rotatory
alcohol to be described under Santalum lanceolatum
yielded a very beautiful derivative of melting point 114°.
Combustion and molecular weight results confirmed their
identity as allophanates.
Determination of a Secondary Sesquiterpene Alcohol
possessing Dextro Rotation.
All commercial samples of the Australian oil were found
to contain a small quantity, not above 10%, of an alcohol
‘which combined with phthalic anhydride only when heated
in an oil bath at 140°. The uncombined oil remaining
after the separation of the phthalic acid ester of the
alcohols which combined with the anhydride in benzene
solution on the boiling water bath was again heated with
this reagent in an oil bath at 140° The regenerated alcohol
for which a high degree of purity is not yet claimed, was
found to possess the following chemical and_ physical
characters.
Nona No. 2.
Boiling point (1 mm.) 145-154° = 146-150°
Specific gravity 33° .. 0.9939 0.995
Opucal rotation -. .. + 184s aes
Refractive Index, 20°. 1.5106 1.5100
Neither sample yielded a crystalline allophanate when
treated with cyanie acid.
Oils from Wood of own Distillation.
The oil from wood of Hucarya spicata when. treated with
phthalic anhydride in benzene solution on the boiling
‘water bath, yielded 50% of alcohols possessing the
following characters :—
70 A. R. PENFOLD.
B. point (4-5 mm.), 160-161° ; specific gravity, 0.942;
optical rotation, +4.9°; and refractive index,
1.5039 at. 20°,
The oil from wood of Santaluwm lanceolatum gave 70%
of an alcohol on similar treatment possessing the following
constants :—
B. point, 163-165° (5 mm.); specific gravity, 0.9474;
optical rotation, —66.7°; and refractive index,
1.5074 at 20°.
The above laevo-rotatory alcohol gave combustion and
molecular results approximating to a formula C,;H.,0.
On treatment with cyanic acid an excellent yield of
erystalline allophanate melting at 114° was obtained.
As a result of the examination of the above oils distilled
from the woods in this laboratory, it is evident that the
West Australian oil contains a sesquiterpene alcohol of
similar formula to santalol having the following approxi-
mate constants :—
B. point, 160-161° (4-5 mm.) ; specific gravity, 0.942-
943 ; optical rotation, +5°; and refractive index,
1.50380 at 20°.
A mixture of this aleohol with the santalols would result
in a Similar mixture of alcohols as occurs in W.A. Sandal-
wood oil with a specific gravity of 0.962. This particular
alcohol has not yet yielded a crystalline allophanate nor
santalenic acid on oxidation.
Distinction between Australian and East Indian Oils by means of
Colour Reaction for Sesquiterpenes.
Small quantities of sesquiterpenes are present in the
Australian oils as is evident by the violet red colour re-
action obtained with bromine vapour when the crude oils:
are dissolved in acetic acid. This colour reaction for ses-
quiterpenes in Australian essential oils is a very commom
one, and has been much referred to in the author’s com-
WESTERN AUSTRALIAN SANDALWOOD OIL. 71
munications to this Society. The East Indian oils, however,
do not give this colour reaction when tested under the same
conditions.
Although the colour obtained is not a very intense one on
account of the small quantities of sesquiterpenes present,
yet at the present time it offers a ready method of rapidly
differentiating the two oils if a quick test be required. The
author is very diffident of colour reactions, but has found
the present one to be reliable. |
In conclusion, I wish to express my best thanks for
valuable assistance rendered by the various firms engaged
in the Sandalwood oil business, such as Messrs. Plaimar
Ltd., Perth, Braddock & Co. Ltd., Perth, and W. K.
Burnside Pty. Ltd., Melbourne.
I am also indebted to the Assistant Economie Chemist,
Mr. F. R. Morrison, F.C.S., A.A.C.I., for assistance in this
investigation.
72 A. R. PENFOLD AND F. R. MORRISON.
THE OCCURRENCE OF A NUMBER OF VARIETIES
OF EUCALYPTUS DIVES AS DETERMINED BY
CHEMICAL ANALYSIS OF THE ESSENTIAL OILS.
Parr EH,
(With remarks on the Ortho-cresol method for estimation of
Cineol)
By A. R. PENFoLD, F.A.C.1., F.C.S.
Curator and Economic Chemist,
and
I’, RK. Morrison, A.A:C.1,, here
Assistant Economic Chemist, Technological Museum, Sydney.
(Read before the Royal Society of New South Wales, 4th July, 1928)
Eucauyptus Dives. var. ‘‘C’’,
In our Part I. communication to the Society on the 1st
June, 1927 (this Journal, Vol. LXI., page 63), reference
was made to the commercial distillation of this form of
Eucalyptus dives, at Tumbarumba, N.S.W. We questioned
the advisability of its distillation on account of the varia-
tion in composition of the essential oil due to the periodic
occurrence of phellandrene, which rendered it unsaleable
as a pharmaceutical oil.
The position with regard to the exploitation of the
species, at the time of publication, was a serious one, as
the distillers had been forced to close down for the reasons
set forth. It was apparent that a field inspection was
urgently desired, and accordingly we visited the Tumbar-
umba district in October, 1927. Previous field experiences
enabled us to select belts of country which would be
reasonably safe to work as phellandrene and piperitone
EUCALYPTUS DIVES. 73
could not be detected upon erushing the leaves between the
fingers, the exquisite aroma of the blend of cineol-terpineol-
citral which emanated therefrom being a characteristic
feature of the majority of leaves from selected fields.
Representative samples of the leaves and terminal
branchlets were personally collected from a series of belts
of country which were examined in the Tumbarumba
district in order to check the field observations, and the
results set forth in the table afford such confirmation in
quite a remarkable manner. ‘This visit, which occupied
but a week-end, enabled the distillers to recommence
operations, and to provide an excellent source of oil of the
Eucalyptus Australiana type, for which there is a steadily
increasing demand. It is the Eucalyptus oil par excellence
for pharmaceutical purposes.
There is a considerable enquiry for high grade water
white oils from EH. Australiana and other species yielding
oils similar in physical properties and chemical composition,
and the economic aspect of the observations recorded in
this paper are of far-reaching importance. It is only a
matter of time when this type of oil must replace the
‘*Mallee’’ oils altogether for medicinal purposes.
Many samples of the oil of EH. dives and its varieties
have been examined since 1917, but not one from this
district had been found to be free of cineol and to contain
piperitone and phellandrene in abundance, thus approxi-
mating to the composition of the oil of the normal E. dives.
This fact was difficult of explanation up to the time of our
field inspection, but a cursory examination of the first belt
of country examined soon revealed trees of the type. We
view this detection of the Type E. dives in this district as
an observation of great importance, as otherwise it would
be difficult to be convinced of its relationship to variety
74 A. R. PENFOLD AND F. R. MORRISON.
‘‘C’’, particularly on account of the wide divergence in
composition of the respective essential oils.
Many of the observations made in the course of the
selection of suitable areas for commercial exploitation are
worthy of record. Mention was made in our Part I. paper
of a clump of 5 trees near Goulburn, 2 of which consisted.
of the normal E. dives, and 3 of Variety ‘‘B’’.
Similar instances were noted at Tumbarumba, an example:
at School Hill being most striking. A sample of oil had.
previously been distilled from the leaves and terminal
branchlets selected from a clump of seven trees, and on.
examination had been found to contain a small quantity
of phellandrene, thus rendering an otherwise excellent oil
valueless for medicinal purposes. The particular belt of
country known as the School Hill was found to be in
general a very excellent field, the leaves being longer and
broader and the trees heavier in leaf than those in other
areas. Moreover, from the leaves on crushing emanated.
the excellent aroma of cineol-terpineol-citral.
It was, therefore, very difficult to account for the
adverse report, and a special search was made for the patch
of trees from which the leaves had been selected. They
were subsequently located, and found to be botanically
identical. The first six examined were found to be true
to H. dives, var. ‘‘C’’; the seventh, however, was found to:
be rich in phellandrene (piperitone and piperitol could.
also be detected, but very little cineol), and to be approxi-
mately the variety ‘‘B’’. It is a remarkable fact that if
the leaves of the first six trees only had been distilled the
oil would have been very favourably reported upon, whereas,
the admixture of the leaves from the seventh tree resulted
in the oil being condemned on account of the presence of
phellandrene. (See result in Table.)
!
EUCALYPTUS DIVES. 71>
Again at Mannus Hill, on the left hand side of the road
a number of trees of the type were found growing distri-
buted amongst a preponderance of trees of variety ‘‘B’’
and variety ‘‘C’’, whilst on the right hand side trees of
variety ‘‘B’’ were found distributed throughout a belt of
variety ‘‘C’’, which predominated. It was a strange
experience to crush the leaves of a tree and to note the
pronounced piperitone-phellandrene odour, and to compare
it with that from a tree but three feet away, the leaves of
which, when similarly treated, exhaled the refreshing
aroma of cineol with a little citral.
Unfortunately, these most interesting areas of country
had, of course, to be rejected as being of no value for
commercial distillation at the present time. Other areas.
of country near Rosewood and Glenroy in the Tumbarumba
district consisting almost entirely of variety ‘‘C’’ were
selected and recommended for commercial distillation.
Summarising the Tumbarumba district as a whole, we can
state that the belts of H. dives are the diametrically oppo-
site of the better known belts of the type. The latter
contain but a small percentage of trees of variety ‘*A’’ and
variety ‘‘B’’ as compared with many of the former, which
consist almost entirely of variety ‘‘C’’, with a small
percentage of trees of variety ‘‘B’’ and the normal type.
Many analyses made since the reopening of the field in
October last on samples representing tons of oil procured
from the selected fields have shown phellandrene not to be
detected according to the B.P. test, and the cineol content
to vary from 60% to 70%. Abundant evidence has thus.
been provided for the justification of our recommendations
based upon field observations.
Determination of Cineol.
Opportunity was taken to determine the cineol contents.
of the oils by the new ortho-cresol method proposed by T.
‘poyjew JOsat9-0yJIQ = 4
*poyjJoUl UIDIOSOY =,
oouep OATS "SJOA Q] (9943 412) :
«Gy “IVA “Sap! VLL | LET | -UMqe | x%2Z | %S Osul= We2Zh | os 9e— | p0es0 | %720 727 / INH POSS
Axjunoy
PO AEN Sepa Bes cl =| ABOSGe | Y6RS" | = © el ce9V ob+| VIZ60 | SCP ee UN -
(peo.s fo apis
eouep |4(%T) . pury 4311) zi
aA, “IEA ‘Saap'y| TOOT | 77S =| -URqe | 4%p~% | %8 VT |9897T| ov I2- | 22060 | STE | TH shuuep
(peos jo opts
%0v pury 32] )
adh Saaip'y| —— | ——— | ynoqge | ere CS ‘SOA HT |ZI8PT] o9 C- | 66060 | %z9' 1 | TH snuuey | /761/01/¢z
a 2 j “UOlze] aoe ae | = = aati :
“£990V des qoy |
; suanuone, lOuColy.
UIE “704 coe -ueyioua | oom. | auoquadia eaeercel te Ve? a oan “Aqe007] aqeq
meg 19184 | S3ianl S
1348q | : =
"M’'S'N ‘“Bquanivquiny, Woy GSATIAINVA SLI GNV SHAIC SALdA TVONA— ATE,
EUCALYPTUS DIVES. 17
Tusting Cocking (Paper read before the British Pharma-
ceutical Conference, 1920; see ‘‘Perfumery and Essential
Oil Record’’, August, 1920, page 281). The method has:
since been reported upon by the Essential Oil Sub-Com-
mittee to the Standing Committee on Uniformity of
Analytical Methods and the findings published in the
‘“Analyst’’ for May, 1927.
As a result of our own work we must admit that the
method is an excellent one, and in our opinion should
certainly be adopted by the B.P. Authorities as a standard
method. In a series of experiments conducted with various.
commercial Eucalyptus oils very good agreement was.
observed when the method was tested against the older and
better known phosphoric acid process. It is necessary to.
point out, however, that abnormal percentages of cineol
were found with oils of the EH. Australiana type, which, of
course, includes H. dives, var. ‘‘C’’, due to the presence of
a-terpineol. Mr. T. Tusting Cocking in his original paper
mentioned that alcohols and esters gave high results, but
looked upon the variation as negligible for B.P. oils. In
our opinion, the variation is too great to be overlooked,
and we would suggest that the determination be made on
the portion distilling below 190° when applied to oils of
this type, in order to ensure accurate results.
A comparison of the results as set forth in the following
table exemplifies our contention in a striking manner, ©
V1Z. :—
E. dives, var. §*C’’. Crude Oil.
Cineol contents
Congealing Cineol contents. by Cresol
Point method, using”
Phos. portion of oil.
(UES=Bs acid Cresol distilling
Method). method. method. below 190°.
Sample No. 1 —17° 57-58% 67.5% 59%
(Nichol’s Country)
Sample No. 2 ailim 62-63% 71.4% 64%
(Commercial)
78 A. R. PENFOLD AND F. R. MORRISON.
Determination of a-Terpineol.
The presence of a-terpineol was confirmed by distilling
200 ec. of H. dives oil, var. ‘‘C’’ (see table), and examin-
ing the portion distilling above 190°. After further
distillation, 16 ¢.c. were obtained boiling between 95-110°
at 10 mm., and possessing the following constants, viz. :—
dks, 0.9383 ; a%° + 0.3°; n® 1.4780.
These figures indicate a high content of a-terpineol.
‘The alcohol reacted very readily with both phenylisocya-
nate and napthylisocyanate, giving good yields of the
respective phenylurethane and napthylurethane melting
respectively at 113° and 148°. The constituent accompany-
ing the cineol in the fraction distilling below 190° could
not be isolated for identification, as on treatment with 50%
‘aqueous resorcin solution the whole went into solution.
The additive compound of cineol and resorcin was
separated and purified and found to be a jae stable
combination. It melted at 83°.
The two samples of oil of var. ‘‘B’’ examined were
found to be low in piperitone. It is as well to make mention
of the fact that in such instances the corresponding alcohol |
is present. Puiperitol is very difficult of separation and
identification in the absence of large quantities of crude
oil, but is readily detected by its characteristic odour, and
consequently we are able to satisfy ourselves of its presence
‘when handling comparatively small quantities of oil and
leaves.
In conclusion, our thanks are due to the Forestry
‘Commission of New South Wales and its officer, Mr. Boyd,
for providing facilities for the field inspection at Tumbar-
umba, and to Messrs. F. Heinecke and M. Kinstler for
-assistance and interest during the visit.
WOODINESS OF PASSION FRUIT. 79
SOME OBSERVATIONS ON THE WOODINESS OR
BULLET DISEASE OF PASSION FRUIT.
By R. J. NOBLE, Ph.D., M.Sc., B.Sc. Agr.,
Biologist, Department of Agriculture, Sydney.
(With Plates I-IV)
(Read before the Royal Society of New South Wales, 4th July, 1928)
Commercial production of passion fruit (Passiflora
edulis, Sims) in N.S.W. is limited practically to the coastal
areas. The vines are grown in plantation blocks or are
interplanted with citrus in the early years of the establish-
ment of citrus orchards. Many growers have relied upon
the crop as their main source of income until their citrus
areas have approached the stage of profitable production.
There is keen demand for passion fruit on the local market,
but in spite of favourable prices for good quality fruit,
and in spite of the fact that there are large areas in the
State which are suitable for passion fruit production, the
supply of fruit is still unequal to the demand. Several
attempts also have been made to establish a passion fruit
pulp industry and guaranteed prices have been offered to
growers for the regular supply of fruit, but these efforts
have proved abortive.
The records on production of the crop in N.S.W. have
been compiled annually by the Government Statistician
for the past 15 years, and this information is shown |
graphically in text Fig. 1. It will be noted that, although
there was a general increase in the number of vines in
bearing from 1921-1925, there was not a comparable
‘mcrease in production during this period. In 1924, 221,178
80 R. J. NOBLE.
vines and in 1925, 219,188 are recorded in bearing, and
the peak in production was reached in 1925, when 73,079
bushels of fruit were harvested. This figure, however, does.
not greatly exceed the 58,901 bushels which were harvested
in 1920 from 95,257 vines.
The average annual yields per vine have been calculated
from the data on production for the past fifteen years and
are shown in the following table :—
Passion Fruit Production in N.S.W.
Average Yield per Vine—1913-1927.
bushels. bushels. bushels.
P98" 2. “use TOTB oy. AE 1923 °°) ao
MODAL oy foil POM bly - 43 1924... 80
1915 obe 48 EO2Os 161 1925)... 488
L9G. L220 746 OA hy) 48 1926. |. A agate
VOUT. 5). Ad hO22 See aR 192%. 39'S
There are records of production in individual planta-
tions in which the yield has exceeded 2 bushels per vine,
but the average yield for the State for the past five years
is only .31 bushels per vine, thus indicating that there is
considerable room for improvement in the methods of
production.
It will be noted from the above table that relatively high
average yields were obtained during the five-year period
prior to 1920. This may have stimulated interest in the
erop and thus partly explain the increase in the number
of vines planted during the period 1921-25. Subsequent
yields, however, have been disappointing, and a decrease
in the number of vines planted is now recorded.
Although the passion fruit will thrive on a variety of
soil types in this State, the best returns under local
conditions only have been obtained when proper attention
has been paid to suitability of location, cultural details,
tte
WOODINESS OF PASSION FRUIT. 8]
addition of adequate and suitable fertilisers and pruning.
There are instances, however, in which the vines have
received apparently suitable treatment and yet have failed
to produce satisfactory returns. Under average conditions
it is considered that the vines are most productive during
the first 3 or 4 years of growth. After this period most
vines are obviously unproductive and are removed. There
are commercial plantations, on the other hand, in which
aig:
Thousands
90 220
80 200
70 180
60 160
50 140
40 #120
30 100
20 80
10 60
fe) 40 ,
Ma 4 15 16 17 "16 '19 "20 ‘ell ‘22 '23 "24 '25) "26 127
Passion Fruit Production in New South Wales from 1913=[927.
A.—Production in bushels.
P.—Total Vines in bearing.
the vines are 8-10 years old and are still in a state of
profitable production. There are isolated instances, also,
of individual vines 15 to 20 years of age which are still
producing fruit. In contrast to the above, vines may
become entirely unproductive in their first season of growth.
Although lack of attention to cultural details is partly
responsible for the relatively poor yields which are now
being obtained, it is considered that the present unsatis-
F—July 4, 1928.
82 R. J. NOBLE.
factory position is mainly due to the incidence of disease.
Two diseases of passion fruit are of special importance in
this connection: (a) Brown Spot caused by the fungus
Gloeosporium fructigenum Berk, and (b) Woodiness.
It is difficult to suggest which disease has been respon-
sible for the most serious losses, but it is considered that
satisfactory control of these diseases would result in a
considerable improvement in production in this State.
There is no doubt that the Woodiness disease is mainly
responsible for the relatively short period of productive-
ness of vines under local conditions.
History of the Disease.
The Woodiness disease has lone been known as a disease
of passion fruit in N.S.W. Allen! in 1901 described several
features of a deterioration disease in passion fruit, and a
few months later Cobb*® published a more complete descrip-
tion of the trouble and also stated that the disease was
known to have occurred in the State prior to 1893, and was
even then a matter of serious concern to growers. The
disease is now known to occur throughout the eastern
States of Australia, but apparently causes most serious
damage only in N.S.W.
Symptoms of the Disease.
The Woodiness disease of passion fruit was thus named
by Cobb (loc. cit.) in allusion to the condition of the fruits
which are produced on diseased vines. The condition is
most commonly observed during the cooler months of the
year, although severely diseased plants may be observed
at any time of the year. Individual vines only may be
affected, or the disease may affect all the vines in a plan-
tation. The Winter crop of fruit is more severely affected
with Woodiness than is the case with the Summer crop.
It has also been observed that slightly affected vines which
WOODINESS OF PASSION FRUIT. 83
‘previously had produced woody fruits may subsequently
produce normal fruits during the warmer months. Such
vines, however, are not as productive as those which
have not been affected with the disease.
(a) The Fruit.
Fruits which are ripened on normal vines are dark
purple in colour, somewhat ovoid in shape, and are
generally symmetrical in appearance. On drying slightly
these fruits become shrivelled in a characteristic manner
(Plate 1, Figs. 1 and 2).
Woody fruits, on the other hand, are generally mis-
sshapen and deformed. Such fruits are often undersized
and when not obviously malformed may be somewhat
spherical in appearance. This symptom has given rise to
a second common name by which the disease is known, viz.,
““Bullet’’. The surface of the fruit may be smooth as in
the case of normal fruits, but more generally it is charac-
terised by the development of cracks and occasionally by
the development of irregularly shaped areas of tissue which
appear to have burst through the skin of the fruit (Plate
1, Figs. 3 and 4). The colour of the woody fruits may be
almost normal, although generally such fruits develop an_
abnormal purplish colouration in contrast to the natural
colour of healthy fruits. Woody fruits are characteristic-
ally hardened, offer considerable resistance to pressure,
and, in contrast to normal fruits, are not readily cut
through. Such fruits on drying do not shrivel uniformly
ain the manner described for healthy fruits. When abnor-
mal fruits of this type are cut through, the tissues of the
pericarp or rind are noticed to be abnormally thickened
(Plate 2, Fig. 5).
Each seed in a normal fruit 1s surrounded by a bright
yellow-coloured arillus which in the mass constitutes the
84 R. J. NOBLE.
edible pulp of the fruit and which possesses a characteris-
tically piquant flavour.
Woody fruits, on the other hand, contain a much anit
quantity of pulp, which is somewhat orange in colour and
through which the black-coated seeds are more readily
observed. The flavour of the pulp of such fruits is insipid
and undesirable. In some cases the woody fruits may be
practically devoid of contents, although superficially there
may be little to distinguish them at times from the fruits.
of a normal plant. Many of the seeds of a diseased fruit
are undeveloped. Although the abovementioned features.
refer particularly to the mature fruits, symptoms of
woodiness also may be observed in fruits which are in the
early stages of development. Such fruits are deformed,
the pericarp shows signs of abnormal thickening, and many
may fall from the vine before reaching maturity
Histological studies of the pericarp of abnormal fruits
indicate that it differs materially from that of a normal
fruit. In transverse section the pericarp of a normal fruit
is seen to be composed of (a) an outer epidermal layer
one cell wide, and then a subepidermal layer three cells
wide, immediately underlying which is (b) a hypodermal
band of small, rounded, thick-walled sclerenchymatous
cells approximately three cells wide, and then (c) a much
wider section of parenchymatous tissue which also includes
the vascular elements (Plate 2, Fig. 6). In abnormal
fruits extensive changes are observed to have occurred in
the tissues which constitute the innermost section of the
pericarp. The cell walls of this altered tissue are thickened
and pitted, and the cells are either devoid of or almost
devoid of normal contents.
Tests with an alcoholic solution of phloroglucin followed
by hydrochloric acid, and tests with usual staining
reagents, indicate that these cells are strongly lignified.
ee
WOODINESS OF PASSION FRUIT. 85
The lignification may be restricted to cells adjacent to the
hypodermal layer of sclerenchymatous tissue or it may
extend throughout the whole of the inner portion of the
pericarp (Plate 2, Fig. 7).
(b) The Foliage.
The foliage of diseased vines is also abnormal. Such
vines have a general appearance of unthriftiness and
appear also as if suddenly checked in growth. The leaves
of the terminal shoots may be stunted and are frequently
eurled, twisted and deformed. Changes may occur in the
chlorophyll-bearing tissues which result in the development ~
of a yellowish green chlorosis, or there may be formed a
definite mosaic of abnormally light green and dark green
areas on the leaf. The tissues of the leaf between the
veins may be raised or sunken, thus giving the leaf a
puckered or crinkled appearance (Plate 3, Figs. 8 and 9;
Plate 4, Fig. 10). Light yellowish green spots may develop
on older leaves which previously were full-grown and
otherwise quite healthy in appearance. The stems of
affected plants, particularly in the region of terminal
shoots, may develop mottled dark green areas which are in
marked contrast to the normal green colouration of healthy
plants. These foliar symptoms have been observed under
‘field conditions both in seedlings and in aged vines.
Nature of the Disease.
_ Many different theories have been advanced as to the
‘causal nature of the disease. Allen’ suggested that the
disease was most serious in vines which were planted in
exposed positions in which they were subjected to high
winds. Frosts and cool nights at the time of setting of the
fruit were considered as a possible cause of the disease,
particularly on vines impoverished through age or lack of
adequate fertilisers. Insufficient moisture and the influence
‘of hot and dry summers were also considered of impor-
86 R. J. NOBLE.
tance. The same writer? has also stated that ‘‘plants:
raised from seed from selected vines and planted out with
every care have been known, owing to hail followed by
drought, to have developed ‘‘bullet’’ at a very early stage:
and never to have made a payable return’’. Cobb® has
reiterated and discussed these possibilities, and has also
figured an undetermined fungus which he had found in:
association with diseased fruits.
In the present study, although the characteristic features.
of the disease did not indicate that the condition was due
to the action of a parasitic bacterial or fungus organism,,
tissue platings and other observations were made to provide:
further information in this respect. In no instance was.
any organism isolated which suggested a causal relationship:
in this connection.
Infection Experiments.
The foliar symptoms of diseased plants indicated that:
the ‘‘ Woodiness’’ disease might be due to the action of a
virus. In November, 1926, a series of inoculation experi-
ments were initiated with a view to determining whether
this was the case. Water infusions were prepared from.
diseased leaves, and from fully-developed and partially-.
developed woody fruits, and small quantities of this.
material were inoculated into the stems of healthy plants,
but in no case did disease develop. In view of subsequent
tests it is possible that the temperatures experienced during
the incubation period of the tests were unfavourable for
the development of symptoms.
The results of the first series of successful experiments.
in this connection are indicated below. As in previous
instances, seed was obtained from normal fruits and the
test seedlings were raised in an insect-proof glass-house.
Plant tissue infusions were prepared from leaves and fruits:
WOODINESS OF PASSION FRUIT. 87
of diseased vines. The tissues were cut up finely, covered
with tap water, and the extract was then decanted and
used as inoculum.
The method of inoculation was similar to that described
by McKinney.’? A few strands of sterile cotton wool were
soaked in the tissue extract and were then placed in the
axil of a leaf of the plant, and then inserted in the vascular
region of the stem by means of a needle. Special precau-
tions were taken to avoid contamination in the separate test
series. Check plants comprised uninjured seedlings,
seedlings in which the stems were punctured with a
sterile needle, or in which were inserted strands of
sterile cotton wool soaked in water.
Nine seedlings were inoculated on the 13th April, 1928,
in the manner described above, using leaf tissue extract as
inoculum. Ten days later the first signs of disease were
noted in the developing leaves of three plants. On the
following day all of the nine plants were showing definite
signs of infection. The leaf blades in all cases were very
much curled downwards, the tips of the young leaves being
pressed up against the base of petioles. Further changes
developed in these plants within the following two weeks.
Elongation of the stems was checked; some of the newer
leaves became chlorotic, while others developed marked
mosaic mottling and others showed puekering of the tissues
between the veins and other distortions of the laminae.
Five weeks after commencement of the test it was
noticed that small yellowish spots were developing on the
mature leaves of the inoculated plants. Six check plants
in this test and thirty-six untreated plants growing under
the same conditions remained healthy. The check plants
were still healthy two months later (Plate 4, Fig. 11).
Similar results were obtained in a further test with diseased
leaf tissue collected from vines in another locality. Four
88 R. J. NOBLE.
plants were inoculated on the 7th May, 1928, and pro-
nounced symptoms of disease were noted fifteen days to
twenty-four days after inoculation. Four check plants
remained healthy. |
Tests with water extracts of the tissues of woody passion
fruits also produced similar results. Six plants were
inoculated with the water extract from woody fruit tissues
on the 4th May, 1928, and definite symptoms of disease
similar to those already described were noted in all six
plants twenty to twenty-seven days after inoculation.
Four check plants remained healthy. Further tests are
in progress with filtered extracts derived from the tissues
of diseased plants.
During the course of field studies on the disease it was
observed that certain plants of another species, viz.,
Passiflora coerulea Linn, showed a diseased condition of
the foliage which resembled somewhat a mosaic condition
occasionally seen on the commercially cultivated vines of
Passiflora edulis. A plant tissue extract was prepared
from the foliage of these abnormal plants and was used in
an infection experiment with seedlings of Passiflora edulis.
Six plants were inoculated on the 13th April, 1928, and
marked symptoms of disease similar to those described in
previous tests were observed on four plants thirteen to
twenty days after inoculation. Six check plants remained
healthy. All check plants throughout each of these series
of tests have remained in a healthy condition and are still
normal.
Masking of Symptoms.
It will be noted that the incubation period varied con-
siderably in respect of the several infection experiments
reported above. In some plants definite signs of infection
appeared 10 days after inoculation, and in other cases
infection was not recorded until 27 days after inoculation.
WOODINBESS OF PASSION FRUIT. 89
In the first series also it was observed that, although marked
foliar symptoms of disease had appeared in all inoculated
plants eleven days after inoculation, the new growth which
thad developed 30 to 40 days after inoculation was appar-
ently normal. Subsequent growth in these plants has since
developed diseased symptoms similar to those which had
first appeared in the plants.
No facilities were available for maintaining uniform
temperature conditions during the progress of these tests,
but thermographic records were maintained throughout
this period. No definite correlations can be made between
the development of symptoms and the prevalence of definite
temperatures, but it is significant that temperatures in
-excess of 80° F. were experienced prior to and during the ~
period in which normal leaves were developed on plants
‘which were known to be infected with the disease. The
‘variation in the incubation period reported in the later
infection tests is considered to be mainly due to the influ-
‘ence of the air temperatures to which the plants were
‘exposed. |
Similar phenomena have been observed under field
conditions. New, apparently healthy shoots have been
produced on diseased vines at various periods throughout
the year. As previously indicated also, the disease is
typically one which is most serious during the Winter
months, and plants which have produced abnormal fruits
-during this period may produce normal fruit during the
‘Summer months.
DISCUSSION.
It is considered from the evidence reported above that
‘the Woodiness disease of passion fruit can be attributed
to the action of a virus. The virus has been proved to be
‘present in the leaves and shoots of vines which have pro-
-duced woody fruits, and these fruits have also been proved
90 R. J. NOBLE.
to contain the virus which, on inoculation into healthy
plants, has resulted in the development of the characteristice
foliar symptoms of disease. A number of the inoculated
test plants are being retained to determine whether the-
disease will be developed in the fruits which they may
develop at a later period. It is considered, however, that
the disease is of sufficient importance to justify an.
announcement of the results which already have been.
obtained.
A Mosaic disease of Passionflower in England is listed
by Bewley,5 but no further information as to its character:
has been available to the writer.
The general foliar symptoms of plants in the present
study are characteristic of those which have been discribed
in a large number of cultivated plants known to be affected.
with a virus disease.
In the infection experiments it was noted also that the
symptoms of the disease in the inoculated plants varied
from time to time in different plants, and at the conclusion
of the tests some plants were observed to be very much.
more severely affected with the disease than was the case
with others. Although this may be explained in part on
the basis of partial masking, it is possible that the virus.
used on the tests was a mixed one, but further data is
required before this aspect of the problem can be:
elucidated.
Lignified cells or stone-cells are known to occur normally
in a wide variety of plants. Artschwager3 mentions that
the presence of such cells in potato tubers may be regarded
as a normal varietal characteristic. Their occurrence in
certain varieties of pears is also a well-known phenomenon,
although their excessive development in these fruits may
result in the production of a diseased condition known as
Lithiasis, which generally is attributed to the incidence of
unfavourable environmental conditions.
WOODINESS OF PASSION FRUIT. 9]
The occurrence of lignified cells in tissues which do not
normally contain them, however, may be due to the influence:
of diseases of the virus type. Artschwager,‘ in studies on
the changes which develop in potatoes affected with phloem
necrosis, has described an abnormal tissue development
which consisted of a progressive legnification of cells im
the phloem region, and he records also a conclusion reached
by Quanjer (loc. cit.), that the hgnification of the cells
of the phloem is a dependable diagnostic symptom for the
identification of leaf-roll, a serious virus disease affecting
this crop.
The extensive lignification of the tissues of the pericarp
of woody passion fruits would appear also to be another
definite manifestation of the effects of a virus disease.
The masking of symptoms such as has been noted in the
case of the Woodiness disease is also a characteristic
feature of many virus diseases affecting cultivated plants,
and this phenomenon has been recorded by a number of
observers.
Johnson® has shown that manifestation of symptoms in
several different types of plants affected with virus diseases.
depended on the air temperatures to which they were
exposed. Critical temperatures varied according to the
type of plant under investigation. Tompkins,'3 in a series.
of temperature control experiments, demonstrated that
relatively short exposure to air temperatures in excess of
24° C. was sufficient to mask development of symptoms of
mosaic in potatoes. Subsequent exposures to low tempera-
tures enabled mosaic symptoms to appear again. Wilcox™
also records a masking effect of high temperatures in rela-
tion to development of mosaic symptoms in raspberries,
and quite recently Plakidas’ has recorded that strawberry
Xanthosis (Yellows) is due to the action of a virus, the
effects of which are masked by exposure to temperatures
92 R. J. NOBLE.
above 80° F. (24° C.). Elmer’ has reviewed the results
of previous workers in this connection, and, in a discussion
of the results of his own experiments with tomatoes affected
with mosaic, suggests ‘‘that plants growing in optimum
environmental conditions for vegetative growth will exhibit
symptoms after a shorter incubation period following
mosaic infection than will plants that are not making a
vigorous growth’’.
The maskine of symptoms of the Woodiness disease
under commercial conditions is of special practical signifi-
cance. Passion fruit plants may be affected with the virus
and may show but little signs of infection during the
Summer months. These vines may be pruned severely in
October or November with a view to the production of a
heavy winter crop. Such action, however, might be quite
disastrous owing to the high proportion of woody fruits
which may develop in this crop, whereas a more profitable
return might have been obtained from the vines had they
been allowed to mature the summer crop in a normal
manner.
Two other destructive plant diseases recently investi-
gated in Australia have been proved to be due to the
action of parasitic viruses, e.g., Bunchy Top in bananas
and Spotted Wilt of tomatoes. Both of these diseases,
however, could only be reproduced consistently in infection
experiments by means of an appropriate insect vector.
Magee? demonstrated that Bunchy Top was transmitted
by means of the banana aphis (Pentalonia nigrovenosa
Cql.), and Pittman,” in trials with a number of potential
carriers of the virus of Spotted Wilt, showed that this
disease was transmitted by means of the rose thrips (Thrips
tabaci Lindeman).
WOODINESS OF PASSION FRUIT. 93
In the case of the Woodiness disease it has been shown
that, under suitable conditions, the virus which causes the
diseasé may be transmitted mechanically.
Under field conditions it is possible that the disease is:
transmitted in a number of different ways. The rubbing
of the shoots of diseased vines against the adjacent shoots
of healthy vines may be a prolific source of infection.
Growers may unwittingly transfer the disease during
pruning operations, and particularly when rubbing off the
laterals in the early stages of growth of vines when the
latter are being trained on to the supporting wires. Insects
which feed on the diseased vines and then migrate to
healthy vines may occasionally also result in transmission
of the disease, although further information in this respect
is not yet available.
SUGGESTIONS FOR CONTROL OF THE DISEASE.
The present status of this investigation makes it possible
for several suggestions to be made in reference to control
measures :—
1. Seedlings should not be raised in proximity to diseased
vines. Severely diseased seedlings frequently have
been observed in such locations.
2. Only healthy seedlings should be planted out. Symp-
toms of the Woodiness disease can be readily detected
in seedlings in the Spring, and any diseased plants
should be immediately removed and destroyed.
3. Careful systematic inspections should be made of the
vines in young plantations, and any vines which are
stunted in growth or which show signs of foliage
abnormality of the types already described should be
removed and destroyed.
4. Very careful observations should be made of vines at
the time of pruning, particularly in the first season of
94
R. J. NOBLE.
erowth. It is most likely that infection may be carried
on the hands of those working among the vines, and
care should be taken to wash the hands well in soapy
water after dealing with a diseased vine and before
working with healthy vines. Field evidence supports
the view that replacements can be safely made shortly
after removal of diseased vines.
When the plantation is more than one year old, the
vines generally have become entangled with one another
on the wires. The removal of a diseased vine then
becomes a matter of extreme difficulty, and it is ques-
tionable whether this is desirable. Removal can hardly
be effected without injuring the shoots of adjacent vines
in the row and thus increasing risks of infection. If
there are but few of such vines present it would pro-
bably be preferable to cut them off at the roots and
then to remove the vines several weeks after they had
dried out. Removal of the diseased vines in this con-
dition then would be less likely to result in infection
of the adjacent vines. However, when infection is
widespread throughout a plantation, all vines should
be destroyed as soon as practicable; but if the crop
indications are such that an immediate return appears
possible, efforts should be made to concentrate on the
Summer crop from such an area. A plantation in this
condition should not be pruned with a view to forcing a
Winter crop, as such a crop would be practically value-
less. Neglected plantations and even isolated vines
showing evident signs of deterioration constitute a
very real menace in the perpetuation of the Woodiness
disease, and every effort should be made to destroy
vines in this condition.
It has been demonstrated that the Woodiness disease
may be transmitted mechanically; thus it is possible
WOODINESS OF PASSION FRUIT. 95
that a number of agencies may be concerned in the
transmission of the disease under field conditions.
Although the passion vine is not normally subject
to serious visitations by insect pests, insects may at
times be concerned in the transmission of the disease.
It is generally impracticable to apply sprays effectively
to vines growing under commercial conditions, owing
to the impossibility of obtaining satisfactory distribu-
tion on the dense mass of foliage. As a measure of good
cultural procedure, however, all weeds which might act
as harbours for insect pests should be kept down as
much as possible.
SUMMARY.
. Passion fruit production in N.S.W. is an industry of
special local importance, but although satisfactory
returns occasionally have been obtained by individual
growers, the returns in most instances are disappoint-
ing. The position is well illustrated by the data on
production for the State.
The average annual yield per vine for the 5 years’
period 1923-1927 was .31 bushels. Records from
individual plantations have exceeded 2 bushels per vine.
There is an increasing demand for the fruit, but the
returns obtained by growers have resulted in discour-
agement, and the industry as a whole is in a somewhat
languishing condition.
This condition is considered to be due mainly to the
incidence of two diseases which affect the crop, viz.,
Brown Spot caused by the fungus Gloeosporium fruc-
tigenum, and a disease known as Woodiness or Bullet.
The latter disease has been the subject of the present
study.
96
R. J. NOBLE.
Woodiness was known to occur in N.S.W. prior to 1893,
and it is still a serious limiting factor in production.
Symptoms of the disease may be recognised in the
general deteriorated appearance of affected vines, in
abnormalities of the shoots and foliage, and in the
woody character of the fruits.
Many theories have been advanced as to the nature of
the disease, but infection experiments have demon-
strated that it is due to the action of a parasitic virus
which, under appropriate conditions, can be transferred
mechanically.
Symptoms of the disease may be masked during the
incidence of air temperatures above 80° F., thus indi-
cating a possible reason for the prevalence of the disease
under field conditions during the cooler months of the
year.
A number of suggestions are made with a view to mini-
mising losses experienced as a result of the occurrence
of the disease.
LITERATURE CITED.
Allen, W. J.
1901. The deterioration of passion vines and fruit.
Agric. Gaz. N.S.W., 12:248-250.
192%. The passion fruit.
N.S.W. Dept. of Agriculture Leaflet 7 pp.
Artschwager, Ernst.
1924, Studies on the potato tuber.
Jour. Agric. Research, 27:828.
1923. Occurrence and significance of phloem necrosis
in the Irish potato.
Jour. Agric. Research, 24:237-245.
Bewley, W. F.
1923. Mycological Report.
Eighth Ann. Report Cheshunt Exper. and
Res. Stat. Herfordshire (1922): 24-45.
(Abstracted in Rev. Appl. Mycology, 2:489).
10.
ALS
ie
13.
14.
WOODINESS OF PASSION FRUIT. 97
Cobb, N. A.
1901. Woodiness of passion fruit.
Agric. Gaz. N.S.W., 12:407-418.
Elmer, O. H.
1925. Transmissibility and pathological effects of the
Mosaic disease.
Iowa Agr. Exp. Stn. Research Bul. 82, pp.
39-91.
Johnson, James.
1922. The relation of air temperature to the mosaic
disease of potatoes and other plants.
Phytopathology, 12:438-440.
Magee, C. J. P.
1927, Investigation on the Bunchy Top disease of
the banana.
Commonwealth of Australia, Council for
Scientific and Industrial Research, Bul. 30,
64 pp.
McKinney, H. H.
O27. Quantitative and purification methods in virus
studies.
Jour. Agric. Research, 35:13-38.
Pittman, H.. A.
1927. Spotted wilt of tomatoes.
Commonwealth of Australia, Council for
Scientific and Industrial Research Jour.,
1:74-77.
Plakidas, A. G.
SP Strawberry Xanthosis (Yellows) an insect-
borne disease.
Jour. Agric. Research, 35:1057-1090.
Tompkins, C. M.
1925. Effect of intermittent temperatures on potato
mosaic. (Abstract.)
Phytopathology, 15:46.
Wilcox, R. B.
1926. Observations on masking of raspberry mosaic
by high temperature. (Abstract.)
Phytopathology, 16:80.
G—July 4, 1928.
98
Plate 1.
Fig.
Plate 2.
Fig.
Plate 3.
Fig.
Plate A.
Fig.
Fig.
Po NM a
10:
It.
R. J. NOBLE.
EXPLANATION OF PLATES.
Normal mature passion fruit.
Normal mature passion fruit after slight drying.
Woody passion fruit.
Woody passion fruit showing cracking of the rind.
(All natural size.)
Upper: Woody passion fruit cut across.
Lower: Normal passion fruit cut across.
x=
xs
Transverse section of outer portion of pericarp of
normal passion fruit. x55.
Transverse section of outer portion of pericarp of
Woody passion fruit. x60.
Terminal shoot of passion vine severely affected
with the Woodiness disease. 3.
Terminal leaves of passion vine, (left) healthy,
(right) affected with the Woodiness disease. x %.
Mature leaf of passion vine affected with Woodi-
ness, showing puckering of tissues between the
veins. 2.
Passion vine seedlings 2 months after commence-
ment of an infection test. (Left) Check healthy.
(Right) Three plants affected with the Woodiness
disease. Xd
Journal Royal Society of N.S.W., Vol. LXII., 1928. Plate I,
Fig. 1. Fig. 2.
Plate IT.
Journal Royal Society of N.S.W., Vol. LXI1., 1928.
20
%
e - OIL LTS.
Journal Royal Society of N.S. W., Vol. LXII., 1928. Plate IIT.
Journal Royal Society of N.S.W., Vol. LXIL., 1928. Plate IV.
Fig. 10.
BROWN ROT OF FRUITS. 99,
BROWN: ROT OF FRUITS, AND ASSOCIATED
DISEASES, IN AUSTRALIA.
Part 1. Hisrory oF THE DISEASE AND DETERMINATION OF
THE CAUSAL ORGANISM.
By T. H. Harrison, B.Sc.Agr.
(With Plates V-IX and one Text-figure.)
(Read before the Royal Society of New South Wales, August 1, 1928)
INTRODUCTION.
Brown Rot is a limiting factor in production of drupe
and pome fruits in many parts of the fruit growing world,
including the temperate eastern and south-eastern fringe
of Australia.
This is due to the following facts :—
(1) It has enormous potentialities for wholesale
destruction of fruit approaching maturity in
the orchard, in transit, in the markets and in
the retail shops.
(2) It is associated with serious twig blighting of
susceptible varieties of several fruits.
(3) It is associated with ‘‘blossom blighting’’ and
resultant crop shrinkage or failure.
(4) Under certain conditions, it is extremely diffi-
cult to control.
Brown Rot is a disease which cannot escape detection,
and hence we find that, as early as 1796, Persoon (34)
wrote of this disease causing rotting of English plums,
peaches and French pears in Europe. Throughout the 19th
century, other pathologists drew attention to the disease.
‘Contributions were made by Ehrenberg, 1818 (18),
100 T. H. HARRISON.
Bonorden, 1851 (7), Hallier, 1876 (22), Schroter, 1893:
(42), Frank and Kruger, 1899 (20), Sorauer, 1899 (44),
and Woronin, 1900 (53) in Europe: and by Peck, 1880:
(33), Smith, 1889 (43), and Pollock, 1900 (36) in America.
Early in the 20th century came a new era of Brown Rot:
study. In 1902, Norton (29, 30) in America, rediscovered
the apothecial stage of the responsible organism. Since:
then many authors have assisted in accumulating the
present considerable store of knowledge concerning the
organism and the disease it causes. A few of the more:
important were Aderhold and Ruhland, Eriksson, and
Wormald in Europe; and Norton, Reade, Pollock, Matheny,
Jehle, Bartram, Conel, Valleau, Cooke, Brooks and Cooley,
Willaman, Ezekiel, Barss, Roberts and Dunegan, and
Rudolph in America.
The object of this paper is to present certain fundamental
considerations in connection with Brown Rot in Australia.
HIstTorRIcAL—THE DISEASE IN ANSTRALIA.
From the earliest days of settlement in this 140 year old
colony, fruit growing has occupied a prominent position.
With the first fleet, Governor Phillip brought to these
shores fruit trees which he obtained from England, Rio
de Janiero, and The Cape. Surprising was the facility
with which the introduced fruits grew in the new country,
where practically no indigenous edible fruits existed. Stone
fruits apparently thrived, for in 1803 Caley (8) reported
‘‘the fruit that had succeeded beyond expectation was the
peach’’. In 1807 Luttrell (28) wrote that the principal
fruits growing included peaches, apricots, nectarines and
plums. In the early twenties of last century Alan
Cunningham was so impressed with the excellence of the
peaches and the ease with which they could be grown, that
he seattered seeds in suitable positions on his exploratory
trips inland. At this time commercial fruit growing was
BROWN ROT OF FRUITS. 101
mainly restricted to the Ryde and neighbouring districts
along the Parramatta River, within easy reach of the only
market—Sydney. As settlement spread, and transport
facilities increased, the area devoted to fruit growing
extended. By the ’eighties, fruit growing was well dis-
tributed over the County of, Cumberland and in its neigh-
bourhood, as far as Kurrajong and Penrith on the west
and Gosford on the north—approximately within a 45 miles
radius of Sydney.
During this developmental period many orchards, of
stone fruits particularly, were planted by hard-working
men. Not only was good land cheap, abundant and easy
to obtain, but labour costs were low. In many eases, how-
ever, the orchardist had little or no knowledge of fruit
growing, and paid no regard to the limitations of a purely
local market. As a natural consequence production out-
distanced demand to such an extent that many of the
orchards, particularly the older ones, became unprofitable.
In many cases these orchard lands were bought by specu-
Jators, companies, ete., for subdivision purposes. The result
‘was the same. Not only was no attention given to the trees,
but the fruit, in many cases, was not harvested.
Into this chaotic state of affairs the Department of
Agriculture was born in 1890. One of its earliest actions
‘was the appointment of Dr. Cobb as consulting pathologist
for fruitgrowers and other farmers. In 1897 Dr.:Cobb (9)
drew a vivid picture of the menace that over 10,000 acres
‘of abandoned orchards situated within 25 miles of Sydney
‘were to the healthy trees of the genuine fruitgrower in
New South Wales. Dr. Cobb recognised that the climate
of Sydney, with its rainfall of 48 inches well distributed
through the year, was ideal for the development of fungi
causing fruit diseases. His appeal for the destruction of
‘the trees was without avail, for no legislation existed to
102 T. H. HARRISON.
enforce the destruction of the trees in these areas. In fact
not until the enlightened days of 1924 (4) was adequate:
provision made for registration of all orchards and the:
destruction of neglected trees.
The Introduction of “Brown Rot.”
The neglected and abandoned orchards contained a large:
quantity of stone fruit trees. To the ideal propagating
eround thus provided the Brown Rot organism was in-.
troduced in the nineties of last century. McAlpine (28)
was the first in Australia to recognise the disease. He
collected infected apricots from near Melbourne, Victoria,
in 1896. In 1898 Allen et al. (8) published a brief
description of the disease. This is the first one published
in Australia, but it is not clear from the context, that the-
disease had been seen in this country. In 1902 McAlpine:
(28) published a popular account of the disease and a
technical description of the fungus responsible. He stated.
that the organism was found on peaches, plums, apricots.
and cherries, and that it caused not only rotting of the
fruit but also blighting of the twigs and withering of the
blossoms. He recognised that warm, moist weather favoured
the development of the fungus.
The next mention of the disease is by Cobb (10), who.
in January, 1904, wrote, ‘‘The Brown Rot has come under
notice in this State (N.S.W.) from time to time for a
number of years, but it seems that it is only during our:
moist seasons or in moist districts that it is to be feared.’”’
It appears to have been common on all stone fruits, for he-
stated, ‘‘The disease appears with us to be quite as common
on the cherry as on any other fruit, and the damage done:
is quite considerable. ”’
For the next few years nothing was written of the
disease, but with characteristic virulence it made its.
presence felt in 1908. Froggatt (21) in 1909 wrote, ‘‘ This.
BROWN ROT OF FRUITS. 103
disease appeared very suddenly in many different districts
just before Christmas (1908) . . . and there was a wide-
spread infestation all through the orchards along the
Hawkesbury River. Early in January the trees were
covered with dead branches and dried-up fruits, but the
disease had stopped spreading due to excessively hot
weather just after the New Year. The nectarines suffered
particularly . . . a number of trees had died. Peaches
were affected in the same manner though less severely,
while in the Japanese plums the fruits only were rotted.’’
In the late summer of 1910 Johnston (25) wrote, ‘‘The
commonest fruit disease in our markets just now is the
3rown Rot, produced by . . . Monilia fructigena. This
parasite occurs on the following fruits in New South Wales,
viz., peach, nectarine, ordinary plum, Japanese plum,
cherry, apple and pear, especially on the first four named.”’
Photographs of progressive stages of the rot in peaches
and nectarines are shown. The epidemic is ascribed to
‘“warm, moist weather which prevailed.’’
The next mention of the disease is by Allen (2), who in
January, 1912, wrote, ‘‘This fungus disease has shown up
earlier this season and in a more virulent form than for
2,
many years.’’ A strong warning is issued to growers about
the necessity for thorough treatment to check the disease.
Season 1913-14 was exceptionally dry and thus we find
that Brown Rot was innocuous, but in season 1914-15 a
serious epidemic was experienced. Darnell Smith (15)
wrote in 1915, ‘‘There is no doubt that Brown Rot is the
most serious disease of stone fruits in this State as it is
in the rest of Australia and elsewhere. . . . While every
season there is more or less rot present, the season just
closing, owing to exceptional weather conditions, has been
a very disastrous one for many orchardists. Peaches,
plums, nectarines and cherries have all been severely
104 T. H. HARRISON.
attacked. In one orchard it is estimated that 1,200 cases
of cherries were lost. . . . During the months of Decem-
ber, 1914, and January, 1915, there was a succession of hot,
humid days with occasional showers and cloudy days.’’
Meteorological data are presented from which it is seen
that the spring months, September and October, had 7
inches rain above normal and that in December 43 inches
rain above normal fell. In the same season in Victoria
specimens were received from many different fruit growing
centres, but it was not until 1918 that a serious epidemic
swept through the orchards south of the Divide in Victoria.
In that year in two orchards alone in one district near
Melbourne £7,000 worth of peaches were destroyed and
the local peach cannery was not able to operate. Other
serious epidemics in the southern State occurred in 1922
and 1923, when losses experienced were exceptionally heavy
in cherries and plums. In 1924 the first epidemic occurred
in districts north of the Divide, but the disease had first
made its appearance there in 1921.*
The history of the disease in N.S.W. continues as follows:
Spinks (45) in 1917 wrote, ‘‘The season 1916-17 will long
be remembered by fruit growers as one of the worst
experienced—due to heavy crops, low prices and ‘Brown
Rot’. . . . Fully 30% of the season’s crop was lost in
consequence of the ravages of ‘Brown Rot’.’’ Season 1917-
18 was also favourable to Brown Rot, for Darnell-Smith
(16) in 1918, in giving notes on some experiments for the
control of Brown Rot in transit, remarked, ‘‘ Fortunately,
as far as the experiment was concerned, Brown Rot was
very prevalent.’’ The next season 1918-19 was very dry.
During the six months, August to January, only 5 to 7
inches of rain fell, of which less than 24 inches fell during
* From a report by Mr. S. Fish, Asst. Pathologist, Dept. of
Agric., Victoria.
aoal ecaiil
BROWN ROT OF FRUITS. 105
-the eritical months of December and January. Brown Rot,
although present, did practically no damage. In 1919-20,
however, favourable conditions for the fungus returned
‘once more. During the critical months 8 to 10 inches of
rain fell and extensive damage resulted. It is estimated
that in some districts that year the losses amounted to
50% of the stone fruit crop, while apples, pears and quinces
were also attacked. The next season (1920-21) was one of
phenomenal rainfall. During December and January 16
to 19 inches of rain fell. Fruit, which was cracked by
the rain, was readily attacked by the Brown Rot organism,
-and losses in apricots, plums, nectarines and peaches were
-again very heavy.
In the spring of 1921 the apothecial stage of the causal
-organism was, for the first time in Australia, found near
Sydney (28). The season which followed was at times
‘very favourable to Brown Rot. Abnormally moist weather
‘was experienced during the latter part of December and
-early January. At this time much of the early stone fruit
crop was approaching maturity. In many eases orchardists
in the neighbourhood of Sydney lost heavily. These three
“seasons of heavy Brown Rot losses were followed by several
years with very little damage resulting from Brown Rot.
With season 1927-28 a return to conditions favourable
‘to Brown Rot was experienced. Heavy losses of fruit
in the orchard, in transit and in the markets have
‘occurred. In many orchards the twig-blighting has
been particularly severe fin nectarines and peaches and
to a lesser extent in apricots and plums. It is obvious
that the severity of Brown Rot infestation in fruit growing
-areas of N.S.W. depends on prevailing climatic conditions.
‘The results of an attempt to correlate climatic conditions
-and Brown Rot infestation will be published later. The
rainfall registrations quoted above apply only to the fruit
growing areas within approximately 45 miles of Sydney,
New South Wales.
106 T. H. HARRISON.
Present Geographical Range in Australia.
From information gathered from many sources the:
present approximate distribution of Brown Rot in Austraha
has been determined. In Queensland Brown Rot occurs.
‘‘in the Stanthorpe district, the only locality where tem-
perate fruits are grown to any extent’’.* In New South
Wales it appears to be present wherever stone fruits are:
erown throughout the coast and tableland areas. oO—NS. cinerea (Y) and local fungus (M) on opposite
sides.
5, 6—Local fungus (M) and Monilia fructigena (F)
on opposite sides.
Controls were established.
Detailed observations of the rots were made at close
intervals until 12/5/’22 when the experiment was dis-
continued. |
The controls at this time were still healthy.
A summary of the observations follows :—
(1) The local Brown Rot fungus produced a black
rot with small greyish to fawn pustules pro-
duced along the cut surface of the fruit and to
a small extent over the rotted areas (Figs. b.
and 3, Plate 4).
ERRATA.
On Page 120, last line, for Figs. b and 3, Plate 4, read Figs. b
and c, Plate VIII.
On Page 12], 5th line, for Plate 4 read Plate VIII.
| a Vr
7 =
—_
~ a = =
= ’
2
- —-
- {
sa
é ~
3
3
i
ie vba intone apa
BROWN ROT OF FRUITS. 121
(2) Monilia fructigena produced a more rapid
brown rot with abundant large buff-coloured
dome-shaped pustules arranged in zones all over
the surface. Some nigrescence later (Fig. b.,
Plate 4).
(3) Sclerotinia cinerea produced the slowest brown
rot, with ash-grey conidial tufts along the cut
surface, but no nigrescence.
Experiment No. 4.
Fresh Apples.
This experiment varied only from No. 3 in that each of
the three fungi :—
Sclerotinia cinerea (England) (Y)
Monilia fructigena (England) (F)
Local Brown Rot organism (M)
‘was inoculated into each of three apples at approximately
equal distances around the girth.
Controls were established and frequent observations
made.
It was hoped by this means to reduce to a minimum the
influence of varying environmental conditions.
The three fungi behaved as in the previous experiment.
‘They are vividly distinct when grown alongside one
another on the same apple.
Experiment No. 5d.
Tomato Inoculation.
The tomatoes selected were firm, red and unblemished.
They were surface sterilised by bathing in alcohol and
‘washing in distilled water.
They were inoculated by inserting loops of conidia into
cuts made in the surface. The inoculum was obtained from
fresh potato plugs. Two tomatoes were inoculated with
the local Brown Rot organism (M), two with Monilia
122
T. H. HARRISON.
fructigena (F) and two with Sclerotinia cinerea (Y)..
Controls were established.
Detailed observations of each tomato were made at close:
intervals and the following final conclusions drawn :—
(1) All three strains of organisms will produce a
(2
nS"
firm rot in tomatoes. In all eases this rot is:
brown at first. The rot caused by the local
organism finally turns black, but that caused
by the other two remains brown.
All three strains produce, on the tomato, the
fruiting bodies typical of the strain. The local
organism (M) produced abundance of fawn-
gsrey pustules over a dark surface. There was:
no surface mycelial growth. Monilia fructigena
(F') produces abundance of large buff pustules
accompanied by a mass of aerial hyphae.
Sclerotinia cinerea (Y) produces the distinct
ash-grey conidial tufts accompanied by a fine
mycelial mat over the infected area.
Experiment No. 6.
Persimmon Inoculation.
Persimmons (Diospyros kaki var.), just ready to eat,
were sterilised by bathing in 95% alcohol and washing in
distilled water. With sterile scalpels the letters M, F and
Y were made in the sides of the sterilised persimmons and
into the cuts were inserted loops of conidia taken from:
fresh cultures on prunes.
The persimmons were inoculated as follows :—
(1) both sides with the local organism (M);
(2) both sides with Mona fructigena (F) ;
(3) both sides with Sclerotinia cinerea (Y);
(4) opposite sides with the local organism (M) andi
Momla fructigena (F) ;
_ ——
BROWN ROT OF FRUITS. 123:
(5) opposite sides with the local organism (M) and
Sclerotinia cinerea (Y) ;.
(6) opposite sides with Monilia fructigena (F) and.
Sclerotinia cinerea (Y).
The inoculations were performed and controls established
on 18th May, 1922. Detailed observations were made
periodically.
The following briefly summarises the results :—
All three strains used will infect and grow on ripe
persimmon. The rate of growth is extremely slow. Hach
strain fruits abundantly on this medium.
(1) The local organism (M) fruited typically. The
conidial tufts were small, fawn coloured and very abundant..
Extreme nigrescence was produced.
(2) Monilia fructigena (F) produced an abundance of
large, loosely packed, dome-shaped, light buff pustules. A
much slower nigrescence was produced. The firm nature:
of the rot produced is striking, for, in many cases, the
uninfected part of the fruit and the controls were shrink-
ing while the infected part retained its shape.
(3) Sclerotinia cinerea (Y) produced no nigrescence and
was much slower in rotting the fruit. Ash-grey tufts were:
produced in abundance along the cut surface and over the
infected area.
It can be seen that the foregoing experiments established
definitely that the common Brown Rot organism found in
Australia was neither Sclerotinia fructigena (Pers.)
Schrot. nor 8. cinerea (Bon.) Schrot. (English form).
Its behaviour in the inoculation experiments and its:
growth in culture indicated that it was identical with the
American organism (8S. fructicola).
A series of experiments was conducted to determine this:
point. A selection of those experiments follows :-—
124 T. H. HARRISON. |
Expervment No. 7.
Quince Inoculation.
Quinces, of approximately the same stage of maturity
-and as free from blemishes as possible, were selected.
They were surface sterilised by bathing in 95% alcohol
-and washed in freshly distilled water. Twenty-four were
then inoculated with the local Brown Rot organism
(Ascospore strain).
Twenty-four with the American organism, S. fructicola.
Twenty-four with Monilia fructigena from Wye, Eng-
land.
Twenty-four with Sclerotinia cinerea from the same
source.
The inoculum was obtained from 10 days old cultures on
potato plugs and consisted of a loop of conidia in each ease.
A wedge of quince was cut out with a sterilised scalpel
and the inoculum placed beneath this wedge—the wedge
being lfted momentarily with a sterilised needle. Two
inoculations were made on each quince. When inoculated,
the quinces were placed in a saturated atmosphere in the
glasshouse.
The inoculations were performed and controls established
‘on 22nd May, 1922.
Detailed records of the progress of the rots were kept.
‘The following summarises the information thus obtained:
All the inoculations were effective, resulting in typical
brown rot lesions.
Local Sclerotinia.
The rot developed quickly, and nigrescenece was very
marked, developing rapidly. Grey to fawn conidial tufts
were very abundant. These were mostly small, and at
times confluent, in some cases arranged in well defined
ERRATA,
On Page 125, 2nd line, for Plate 4 read Plate VIII.
Same Page, 17th line, for Plate 4 Fig. a, read Plate VIII. Fig. a.
be)
BROWN ROT OF FRUITS. 125-
zones. They appeared very soon after rotting commenced..
(Plate 4, Figs. d.e.)
American Sclerotima.
This was inseparable under the conditions of the experi-
ment from the local Sclerotinia.
Sclerotuna cinerea (England).
The rot was not so rapid as above. Nigrescence was
absent, the rotted fruits remained entirely brown. Tufts.
of aerial hyphae developed some time after the rot com-
menced, but no conidia were produced until the rot was.
well advanced. The sparse conidial tufts were ash-grey.
Momlva fructigena (England).
The rot developed very rapidly, but nigrescence was not
so intense as that produced by the Australian Sclerotinia.
Very large aerial hyphal masses were produced. These soon
were covered with the buff coloured conidial tufts. (Plate
4, Fig. a.) The nature of the mummified fruit produced
is interesting. Those of the Australian and American
strains were hard, dense black and much shrivelled—deeply
furrowed and ridged. Those of both Sclerotima cinerea
(England), and Monilia fructigena were not nearly so
Sshrunken—the outline of the quince being maintained.
The brown colour of the S. cinerea mummy readily
separated it from that of M. fructigena, which was black.
Experiment No. 8.
Blossom Blight.
In September of 1922, an experiment was conducted to
determine the relative virulence of the Australian strains
of the Brown Rot organism and the American Sclerotima,
in attacking plum blossoms.
Conidia for the inoculations were obtained from young
cultures on potato plugs. Two strains of the local organism
126 T. H. HARRISON.
(one ascosporous and the other conidial), and one Ameri-
can strain were used. Three methods of inoculation were
employed.
(1) Loop.—tn this method a sterile platinum loop, after
being dipped in sterile water, was brought into contact
with tufts of conidia, and the resultant loop of spores
transferred to the stigma of the flower.
(2) Prick.—In this method the ovary was pricked with
‘a sterile needle, which was placed in sterile water, touched
on conidial tufts and inserted into the opening previously
made at base of ovary.
(8) Spray.—l10 ees. of sterile water were added to a
tube containing a heavily sporulating plug of potato, and
the resultant spore suspension transferred to a small bottle
containing 40 ecs. sterile distilled water. A scent spray
previously sterilised by immersion in 90 per cent. alcohol
was used to convey the spores to blossoms.
The clumps of flowers were selected as far apart as pos-
sible to offset the danger of contamination. Immediately
after inoculation, each clump was enclosed in waxed trans-
lucent paper bags, and a label attached to the base of the
clump.
All possible care was taken to perform the inoculations in
as aseptic a condition as possible. Controls were established.
Detailed observations were made periodically.
Briefly, the results were as follows :—
(1) Loop inoculation.
All three strains caused blossom blighting. No difference
could be noted between the strains in their ultimate effect,
although the Australian strains were more rapid in their
action. Conidia were produced on rotted blossoms which
were browned. From 80 to 100 per cent. of the flowers in
various groups became infected.
hel
bo |
BROWN ROT OF FRUITS. 12
(2) Prick inoculation.
The same effect was produced in this case as in that of
‘the Loop inoculation, except that the percentage of infec-
tion was higher. Conidial production was variable.
(3) Spray inoculation.
Infection in this instance was from 60 to 80 per cent., but
possessed the same features as those of Loop inoculation.
Controls in all cases were healthy, setting fruit in a
normal manner.
Experiment No. 9.
Apple Inoculation.
Trivett Seedling apples carefully selected as being of
approximately the same state of maturity were picked and
very carefully handled to avoid bruising. These were sur-
face sterilised with 95 per cent. alcohol and rinsed in
distilled water.
The apples were inoculated by inserting conidia beneath
a wedge of apple cut out with a sterile scalpel and lifted
momentarily with a sterile needle. The inoculum in each
ease was obtained from fresh cultures on sterile potato
plugs.
Two strains of the Brown Rot organism were used, e.g. :
(1) The American Sclerotinia.
(2) The Australian Sclerotinia—An ascospore strain
obtained in September, 1922, from an apothecium arising
from apple mummies.
With each strain twenty-four apples were inoculated and
placed in a saturated atmosphere in the glasshouse. Con-
trols were established. Observations were made at close
intervals until the infected apples were completely rotted
and mummified.
128 T. H. HARRISON.
A summary of the result is as follows :—
(1) American Sclerotina—tIn every instance inocula-
tion was successful, and the apples were completely rotted
in 8 days. The rot was firm and at first brown. Nigres-
cence did not develop to any extent until the fruit was com-
pletely rotted. Small, rounded, grey to fawn, well defined
pustules were fairly abundant over the rotted areas. At |
times these were confluent, especially around the margins:
of the wedges removed for the purposes of inoculation. As.
the apples mummified they became black and the conidial.
tufts assumed a bright fawn colour.
(2) Australian Sclerotunia—The local strain differed
only from the above in the greater abundance of conidial
tufts. These were arranged in concentric rings over the
whole surface of the rotted fruits.
DISCUSSION.
Concurrently with the experiments described above, the
Australian and American strains of Sclerotima and many
local Monilia strains were sub-cultured some hundreds of
times on different media.
Apothecia of the Australian organism were also available
in large quantities, and the author was enabled to obtain
measurements of asci and ascospores.
As a result of the correlation of all available data, the
author was convineed that the Brown Rot organisms
common in America and Australia were identical.
At that time (1922 and 1923), the author considered
that while American pathologists recognised certain
differences between the American form and Sclerotinia
cimerea, the feeling was against the use of the term, SV.
cinerea forma americana, as throughout the American
literature the name S. cinerea was retained. Even in 1924
Roberts and Dunegan (39), after careful consideration of
Petes 4
BROWN ROT OF FRUITS. 129
all available information, preferred to adhere to the name
Sclerotinia cinerea (Bon.) Schrot, for the American Brown
Rot fungus.
Consequently, in 1923, the author felt justified in stating
‘. . 6/315 feet
172 Cc. A. SUSSMILCH AND WM. CLARK.
The above figures must be taken as mere approximations
as the incompleteness of the section makes the determina-
tion of actual figures impossible.
1.—The Andesites.
Nelson’s Bay.
A well-defined flow of andesite (No. 1 flow) outcrops
at intervals along the south shore of Port Stephens from
Nelson’s Bay to Corlette Point. This flow strikes about
EK. 20° N. and dips 8. 20° E. at an angle of about 20°. The
section adjoining the steamer jetty at Nelson’s Bay, in
descending order, is as follows :—
Conglomerate (with very large boulders) .. 100 feet
Amdesite (No. 2 flow) ..°..4 \¢.')..0 42) a
Conglomerate SO eo Qo ea
Andesite (No. 1 flow) .. «.: .. 41... . oe
Here the No. 1 andesite flow occurs right at sea level.
The lower part is quite glassy, the glassy phase merging
upwards into a lithic variety. The rock is a hornblende-
pyroxene-andesite and is described in detail in a later
section. The full thickness of this flow is not exposed,
but it is at least 100 feet thick. The No. 2 flow is similar -
in character to the No. 1 flow. The lower andesite gives
a continuous outcrop westwards from the jetty to the
eastern end of Dutchman’s Beach, then follows a sand
flat, followed by a smaller outcrop at the western end
of Dutchman’s Beach. From this point westwards nothing
but sand can be seen until Corlette Point is reached.
Here the andesite flow may be seen resting upon a bed
of conglomerate, both dipping southwards. It is uncertain
as to whether this flow represents the No. 1 or the No. 2
flow at Nelson’s Bay. If it is the No. 2 flow, then the
No. 1 flow will be found here, not far below sea level,
underlying the conglomerates above referred to.
GEOLOGY OF PORT STEPHENS. 173
Tomaree or South Head.
A small outcrop of andesite occurs here at sea level on
the west side of the headland, striking north and south,
and dipping easterly. It is immediately overlaid by a
massive toscanite flow.
Yacaaba Headland (North Head).
Here also, just at sea level, is an andesite flow outcrop-
ping along the northern shore of the headland. This flow
strikes E. 25° N. and dips 8S. 25° E., with a massive
toscanite flow resting immediately above it. As the
andesite flow extends below sea level, it 1s impossible to
determine its true thickness. An interesting feature here
is the occurrence of a bar of toscanite cutting across the
andesite flow and containing fragments of andesite. The
andesite occurring at the three abovementioned localities
are probably all parts of one and the same flow, but it is
difficult to reconcile the strike at Tomaree with that at
Nelson’s Bay and at Yacaaba headland.
Point Stephens Headland.
Point Stephens headland is an island consisting entirely
of andesite, joined to the mainland by a narrow sandspit
which is awash at high tide. A small outcrop of Andesite
also oceurs on the opposite mainland at the northern end
of Fingal Head. This andesite is similar in character
to that occurring at Nelson’s Bay. If part of a flow, it is
higher in the series than the Nelson’s Bay flow. The shape
of the outcrop, however, and the relation to the adjoining
rocks is not suggestive of its being a typical sheet. We
suggest that it may be, probably, an andesite lava cone
extruded at the same time as the Nelson’s Bay flow, and
afterwards surrounded and covered by the later toscanite
and rhyolite flows and their associated sedimentary rocks,
but the available evidence does not admit of proof one way
or the other.
174 C. A. SUSSMILCH AND WM. CLARK.
A similar andesite voleaniec cone of Kuttung age, sur-
rounded and covered by younger strata, and since partly
re-exposed by the partial removal of the overlying strata,
has been recorded as occurring at Blair Duguid, in the
Hunter River Valley.s
2.—The Toscanites.
Numerous and massive flows of -toscanite occur
throughout the district, but as the outerops of these are
isolated from one another by sand flats or by water, and
as there has been, in places, considerable displacement of
outcrops by faulting, it is somewhat difficult properly to
eorrelate the various outcrops. There would appear to
have been at least two distinct toscanite flows or groups
of flows. These two groups are referred to respectively
as (a) the Nelson’s Head-Yacaaba flow and (b) the
Soldiers Point-Ghan Ghan group of flows.
(a) The Nelson’s Head-Yacaaba Flow.
Nelson’s Head.
The whole of Nelson’s Head consists of toscanite
extending from low water mark to the top of the hill on
which the lighthouse stands. The strike is about E. 20° N.
and the dip to the south. On the northern face of the
headland the rock at sea level is entirely glassy for a
thickness of from 10 to 15 feet. Upwards, this glassy
phase merges into a lithodal phase, the latter continuing
to the top of the hill. The base of the flow is below sea
level, but the thickness is not less than 100 feet.
Fly Pont.
This is a low headland occurring to the west of Nelson’s
Head. A similar occurrence of toscanite occurs here, with
a glassy selvedge at the base of the flow, but this glassy
phase is less well marked, and the flow, as a whole, is not
so thick, much having probably been removed by denuda-
GEOLOGY OF PORT STEPHENS. 1795
tion. The base of the flow here is, however, exposed, and
at low water a bed of conglomerate may be seen underlying
the toscanite. This is similar in character to the con-
glomerate which overlies the andesite at Nelson’s Bay.
A dip fault probably occurs between Fly Point and
Nelson’s Head, which has displaced the strata to the north
on the east side of the fault.
Yacaaba Headland (North Head).
The sequence of strata in this headland is given in fig.
1. It will be seen that the Toscanite flow here rests
directly upon the andesite flow and has a thickness of
about 1,000 feet. The toscanite flow here has a glassy
selvedge at its base similar to that at Nelson’s Head. The
most interesting feature here is a dyke or neck of toscanite
SEA LEVEL
Fig. 1.—Sketch section through Yacaaba Headland. A, Limestone with
associated Tuffs; B, Conglomerates; C, Andesite; D, Toscanite. H, Fault.
which cuts through the underlying andesite flow. In the
toscanite are numerous rounded fragments of a more basic
rock which is much altered but which appears to have
been derived from the Andesite. Whether neck or dyke,
this would undoubtedly appear to be an opening through
which the overlying toscanite found its way to the surface.
As has already been pointed out, this toscanite overlies
the andesite at Yacaaba and Tomaree. No andesite is
exposed at Nelson’s Head or Fly Point, but may well be
below sea level at these points.
No outerop of this toscanite flow can be found imme-
diately above the andesites which extend from Nelson’s
176 Cc. A. SUSSMILCH AND WM. CLARK.
Bay to Corlette Point. The flow may have pinched out
‘in this direction, or if it occurs, its outcrop is covered by
recent sand deposits. The fact that the flow is about 1,000
feet thick at Yacaaba Head and only about 40 feet thick
at Fly Point suggests that it thins rapidly in a westerly
direction. The great thickness of toscanite at Yacaaba
may, of course, be due to the coalescence of the Nelson’s.
Bay flow with some of the overlying toscanite flows of that
locality.
(b) The Soldiers Point-Ghan Ghan Toscamtes (No. 2 Belt).
Lying to the south of Nelson’s Bay and extending from
the sea coast westwards to Scamander Bay there is a belt
of isolated hills all consisting of toscanite. The strike
of this line of hills is approximately east and west. After
crossing Scamander Bay, this toscanite belt is picked up
again on the western side of the bay at Round Head, and
continues from there in a north-north-west direction to
Soldiers Point, as may be seen from the map. The various
islands adjacent to Soldiers Point, including Middle Island,
consist of the same rock. ‘Toscanite also occurs on the
north shore of Port Stephens opposite to Soldiers Point,
very massive outcrops occurring here on either side of
Fame Cove. This great belt of Toscanite undoubtedly
includes a number of separate lava flows. At its eastern
end the double line of hills suggests at least two massive
lava flows. Throughout the whole belt the rock from all
the outcrops is similar in character and looks lke a typical
Quartz-Porphyry. It also closely resembles the toscanites
occurring at Nelson’s Head and at North Head. The
numerous outcrops in this toscanite belt are separated
from one another by sand dunes and sand flats, and no
associated sedimentary strata are visible, so that no direct
observations of either dip or strike could be made.
Journal Royal Society of N.S.W., Vol. LXIT., 1928. Plate XIV.
Fig. a.
Raised Boulder Beach (Present day beach centre-left), Morna Point.
Fig. 6.
Raised Boulder Beach, Morna Point.
”
=
Meare
cellos scstep im 0
tee edn, Ee aes
Boat
Tyeient oma
Mae
.
Plate XV.
@)
°
192
Lodge
an fo)
W
S
‘nal Royal Society of N.
Jows
‘prop ddIvULO T, JO
YINOS 4Svod-vag ‘S|[IF] o@lUwVoso T,
pues acer AN Mayen Wi esau Sion mc serene ks
Ae SY
GEOLOGY OF PORT STEPHENS. LE
3.—The Rhyolites.
These lava flows outcrop in the southern part of the
area mapped and form a belt whose outcrop curves sympa-
thetically with that of the No. 2 toscanite belt. Outcrops
occur on the sea coast (a) at Fingal Head and (b) at
Morna Point, and further outcrops occur at Bob’s Farm
on the east side of Tilligherry Creek, and at The Gibbers
on the west side of Tilligherry Creek. Snapper Island,
in the west part of Port Stephens, is probably a continua-
tion of this belt.
Fingal Head.
At the northern end of Fingal headland there occurs
an outcrop of andesite, previously referred to. Im-
mediately overlying this is a rhyolite lava flow, the
outcrop extending from here to the southern end of Fingal
Head, a distance of about 160 chains. The actual thickness
of this flow cannot be measured, but it is something more
than 200 feet.
Morna Point.
The outcrop here is exactly similar to that at Fingal
Head, and this outcrop appears to have been separated
from that at Fingal Head by a large dip-fault which has
heaved the strata on its east side to the north. The rock
both here and at Fingal Head is indistinguishable in hand
Specimens from the toscanites already referred to. At
Morna Point the rhyolite flow appears to be dipping a
little east of south.
Bob’s Farm (Fenningham’s Island).
Between here and Morna Point is an extensive swampy
sand fiat with no outcrops. The outcrop at Bob’s Farm
occurs at the western edge of this flat and at the eastern
side of Tuilligherry Creek, and the rock here has been
quarried for road-making purposes. At this locality the
L—Septemter 5, 1928,
178 Cc. A. SUSSMILCH AND WM. CLARK.
rhyolite is underlain by well-stratified tuffs and cherty
shales, the latter containing the fossil plant Rhacopterts.
Underlying this again is another rhyolite flow.
The Girbbers.
This locality occurs on the other side of Tilligherry
Creek, immediately west of Bob’s Farm, and gives one of
the best geological sections of the district. (See fig. 2.)
The details of this section in descending order are as
follow :—
Thickness.
Rhyolite (No, 3 flow) ..2. ox 12 90) 2sUeeas
Tufts SS aes am re Le
Cherty shales ah baer wan eee eee
Tuttis and Conglomerates... .. ..) 2 gels
BRhyolite (No. 2 flow) ..., ... .: ... 220 se
Tuffs and Conglomerates .., ... 1. sco je eee
Tuffs Je a a tae Sy es oral eee
Rhyolite (No. 1 Ane SE i: ele ec ee
Tuffaceous sandstones with fossil Ante so vat NOOO T
Conglomerates wes ty cele vubeng — U/dley Walelee. © | 2S aaanmees Cae
Total thickness .. 2,270 feet
It will be seen that there are three distinct rhyolite lava
flows here. The whole succession of strata at this locality
is very similar to that which occurs in the Paterson district.
The top rhyolite flow would be the equivalent of that
which occurs in the railway cutting at the Paterson railway
station.
4.—The Sedimentary Rocks.
The Burinds Series.
Strata of Burindi (Lower Carboniferous) age are
extensively developed in the Pindimar district on the
northern side of Port Stephens, but these will not be
described here; the occurrence of probable Burindi strata
GEOLOGY OF PORT STEPHENS. 179
occurring at Yacaaba headland might, however, be referred
to here. These are shown in the section in fig. 1. These
strata strike EH. 35° N., have a steep dip, and consist of a
massive bed of conglomerate overlying a thin bed of
tuffaceous limestone. The lmestone is very impure,
contains crinoid stems, and is lithologically similar to
limestones which occur in the Burindi series in other parts
of the district. The conglomerates which overle the lime-
stone are very massive and are crowded with pebbles from
6 to 8 inches in diameter. This conglomerate may possibly
be the equivalent of the Wollarobba conglomerate which.
in another part of the district, occurs at the base of the
Kuttung series. Strike faulting has brought these beds
against the toscanite, which is relatively higher in the
series,
: SEA LEVEG
eS or eae
m7
PigeegSesH Conciomersien; D, Toftaccona Seniatones: H, Conglomerates:
H, Alluvium.
The Nelson’s Bay Conglomerates.
These are associated with the Andesites which occur at
Nelson’s Bay, already referred to. They show very little
stratification and contain well-rounded boulders of all sizes
up to 3 feet or even more in diameter. These boulders
consist mainly of granites of various kinds, Quartz-
Porphyry and Felspar-Porphyry. The material in which
the boulders are embedded is very largely tuffaceous. At
Corlette Point similar conglomerates occur, associated with
the andesite there, but the boulders are relatively fewer
in number. These Nelson’s Bay conglomerates are very
similar in their lithological characters to the conglomerates
which are associated with the andesites on the same horizon
in the Kuttung series at Martin’s Creek, near Paterson.
180 Cc. A. SUSSMILCH AND WM. CLARK.
The Gibbers.
Particulars of the sedimentary rocks occurring here have
already been given when referring to the rhyolite of the
same locality. The occurrence in these of the fossil plant
Rhacopteris (Aneimites) inequilatera proves that those
strata belong definitely to the Kuttung series. These
strata, with their associated rhyolite flows, correspond in
character and horizon with what one of us (C.A.S.)3 has
previously described as the Mt. Johnson series in the
Paterson district, and they are quite similar to them in
their lithological characters.
The Anna Bay Bores.
Some years ago several bores were put down in the
southern part of this region for the purpose of prospecting
for coal. Details of the strata penetrated by these bores
are given by Sir T. W. E. David in his monograph on the
Hunter River coalfield.t_ No. 1 bore, which is 24 miles
west of Morna Point, after passing through 192 feet of
recent alluvial deposits, penetrated 126 feet into a Quartz
Felspar-Porphyry. This is evidently the Morna Point
Rhyolite flow; the angle of its dip is given as 23°. The
No. 2 bore, after passing through 192 feet of recent deposits,
penetrated 257 feet of cherty shales alternating with tuffa-
ceous conglomerates and tuffaceous sandstones. These
strata dip 8.S.W. at an angle of 22° and apparently overlie
the top rhyolite flow. The cherts contain the fossil plant
Rhacopteris.
5.—Geological Structure.
Reference to the map will show that the outcrops of the
Kuttung Series form a great curve, convex to the south.
In the western part of the area the strike of the strata is
approximately N.N.W., and the dip westerly; from
Corlette Point to Nelson’s Bay the strike is nearly east
and west, and the dip southerly, while in the eastern part
GEOLOGY OF PORT STEPHENS. 181
of the area the strike is E. 20° N. to H. 30° N., and the dip
S. 20° EK. to 8. 30° E. It is evident, therefore, that the
general structure is that of a great plunging anticline, the
axis of which strikes approximately north and south, with
a pitch to the south. This conforms to the general geolo-
gical structure of the carboniferous formation right along
the southern margin of New England from the Pacific coast
to Scone.
The probable existence of faults has been referred to
(a) at Nelson’s Head between West Point and Fly Point,
(b) between Fly Point and Nelson’s Head, and (c)
between Morna Point and Fingal Head; on the accom-
panying geological map these faults have been joined up as
shown, but, of course, this joining up is, to a large extent,
conjectural. These faults are all dip faults. The existence of
a strike fault has been suggested as occurring at North
Head, as shown in fig. 1. This strikes about E. 30° N.
II.—PETROGRAPHY.
The Kuttung lava flows fall naturally into three distinct
groups: (a) the andesites, (0) the toseanites, (c) the
rhyolites, extruded (with perhaps one exception) in that
order.
1.—The Andesites.
These are all hornblende-pyroxene-andesites, and they
may be divided into two varieties: (a) the glassy variety,
(b) the lithoidal variety.
a. The Glassy Andesite.
This occurs at West Point, Nelson’s Bay, where it is
found at the base of the lowest andesite flow; there is a
similar occurrence at Corlette Point.
Megascopic Characters.——The fresh rock is black in
‘eolour with a resinous lustre, and shows abundant pheno-
erysts, of felspar, hornblende and pyroxene.
182 C. A. SUSSMILCH AND W. A. GREIG.
Microscopical Characters.—The ground mass shows well-
marked flow structure, with some spherulitic structure
present in places, and in this groundmass is set an abun-
dance of phenocrysts of plagioclase, hornblende and
pyroxene, with a few crystals of quartz and biotite; the
two latter are very rare. Occasional small areas occur
which show hyalopilitic structure and smaller phenocrysts
than in the average rock. In such areas the felspars are
lath-shaped, with their long axes in the direction of flow.
The plagioclase in general is tabular in habit and almost
quite fresh with a composition close to Ab, An;. The
hornblende also is quite fresh and frequently twinned.
The pyroxene is less abundant than the hornblende. It.
oceurs both as occasional phenocrysts and as quite small
crystals included in the felspars. It is weakly pleochroic
and has parallel or low extinction angles. It appears to
be hypersthene. The iron ores are moderately abundant
and occur both as inclusions in the larger phenocrysts and
in the groundmass. An occasional small erystal of biotite
may be seen, but this mineral is rare. Apatite is present
as occasional small needles included in the felspar. In
spite of the fact that the norm shows 31.2 per cent. of
quartz, only very few phenocrysts of this mineral have
been seen in the slides.
A noticeable feature of the glassy andesites is the
remarkable freshness of all the phenocrystic minerals.
This is in marked contrast with the condition of the similar
minerals in the lithoidal variety of andesite.
b. The Lithoidal Andesites.
These Andesites are similar in their characters from all
the localities from which they have been found in the Port
Stephens district.
Megascopic Characters.——In hand specimens the rock is.
dark blue in colour, showing abundant phenocrysts of
GEOLOGY OF PORT STEPHENS. 183
felspar, with less abundant phenocrysts of black ferro-
magnesian minerals,
Microscopic Characters——The groundmass is eryptocry-
stalline and very fine-grained. Traces of what appears to
have been a flow structure occur in places, but there is no
evidence to suggest that the groundmass, as a whole, was
originally glassy.
The following minerals are present in order of abun-
dance :—(1) Plagioclase, (2) Hornblende, (3) Pyroxene,
(4) Magnetite.
The plagioclase phenocrysts are tabular in habit, and
abundant. Albitization is well marked, alteration having
taken place along irregular lines and cracks. Occasionally
some chloritization has taken place, but is not common.
The hornblende shows undoubted resorption, and the
margins of the crystals all have a very dark zone, probably
due to the development of minute erystals of iron oxide.
This is particularly noticeable in the microslides of the
andesite from North Head. The pyroxene crystals are
entirely replaced by chlorite, and it is now impossible to
determine their true nature. An occasional phenocryst of
quartz has been seen in some of the slides.
An analysis of each of the two varieties of andesite is
given in Table I; the specimens selected for analysis came
from West Point, Nelson’s Bay. An important difference
between the two rocks as shown by the analyses is in the
relative proportion of the alkalies and lime. This is shown
in the following table :—
Port Stephens. Martin’s Creek.
Glassy Lithoidal Glassy Lithoidal
Variety Variety. Variety: Variety.
CaO ee... 6.38 4,28 4.11 3.14
Nes Oar 2.20 3.39 3.99 4.41
OS See 0.66 3.02 M2 3.92
184 C. A. SUSSMILCH AND W. A. GREIG.
The lower percentage of alkalies in the glassy rock is
very marked. This is particularly so in the case of the
potash, and, in order to make sure that no mistake had
been made, the potash and soda in the glassy rock were
re-determined. The percentage of lime, on the other hand,
is noticeably higher in the glassy rock. The corresponding
constituents of the glassy and lithoidal andesite from
Martin’s Creek+ are given for comparison. These show a
similar variation between the two rocks, but not to such
a marked extent.
The norms of the two Port Stephens rocks, as calculated
from the analysis, are as follows :—
Glassy Variety. lLithoidal Variety.
01 Ala ee ro 31.20 19.86
Orthoclase <..2 2) 08 Soe ees)
WAM IGG <5 o's SRR A tees 18.34 28.82
PAMOFGNICC: ~ 02.2 = oe ee 29.74 17.79
Femic Minerals .... 7.92 8.01
Tiron Ores. ac) s «ee 4.14 4.17
On account of its alkaline content the glassy rock gives
a much lower percentage of albite and orthoclase than does
the lithoidal variety, and a correspondingly higher
percentage of quartz.
2.—The Toscanites.
These, like the andesites, fall naturally into two
varieties: (a) a glassy variety, (b) a lithoidal variety.
a. The Glassy Toscanite.
This has been found only at the base of the oldest
toscanite flow, and in each of the three localities at which
it has been found, namely, Fly Point, Nelson’s Head and
Yacaaba Head, it occurs just at sea level. The occurrence
at Nelson’s Head ean be taken as typical of all three locali- |
ties, and it is this rock which has been analysed.
SiO,
Al;0O,
Fe;0,
reO
MgO
CaO
Na,O
K,0
H;0 (100°c)
-H,0 (100°c+)
CO,
TiO,
ZrO,
P.O,
SO;
Cl
F
S (FeS,)
Cr,05
N10+-CoO
MnO
BaO
SrO*
i, Ov
V30;
CrO
Less O=Cl1
Sp. Gr.
GEOLOGY OF PORT STEPHENS.
Table I.
Analyses of Port Stephens Rocks, by W. A. Greig.
III.
Glass
IV.
Tos-
canite
We
Tos-
canite
VI.
Toscanite
VII.
185
VIII.
Toscanite] Rbyolite | Rhyolite
—_—————$-——. | [| | Sitar a oF
71°72 | 73°90
_ SS | L______. f EE
a | SSF eS OO
I. II.
eeae Andesite
63°17 | 63:92
15.10 | 1537
2°20 2°90
2°16 2°34
2°35 2°60
6°38 4°28
2°20 3°39
066 3°02
0°47 0:41
4°73 1-65
Absent! Absent
0 50 0:05
Absent} Absent
0°14 0°16
Absent! Absent
0-11 0:07
Absent; —
s) Absent
0:10 0:07
0°03 0 04
Absent | Absent
Present] __,,
Tracet e
Absent Pe
100°30 | 100°27
02 01
100°28 | 100°26
27524) 2°694
11°50
2°30
0°63
0°41
2°56
3°40
2°53
0°35
4°51
Absent
0°15
Absent
0:03
0:06
0°10
Absent
0°11
0°05
Absent
Present
Absent
3)
100°41
0-2
3°50
4°04
Localities.—I.
*Spectroscopic Reaction.
and IL.,
VIII., Morna Point.
West Point, Nelson’s
IV., Fly Point; V., Nelson’s Head; VI.,
73°64
3°42
4°59
Bay ;
73°90
11°95
1°70
0°99
0°55
1°50
3°10
4°74,
0°21
1°37
Absent
0°20
Absent
0°05
Absent
Tracet
Absent
0:06
0°06
Absent
Tracet
Absent
100°38
100°38
2°613
73969) 74°74
12°65 11°89
1°85 1°50
0°40 0°27
0°50 0°83
0°64 0°74
3°18 2°96
5°07 5°23
0°45 0°60
1°33 1°14
Absent | Absent
0:20 0°17
Absent} Absent
0:07 0-02
Absent 0:02
Tracet 0°10
= Absent
Absent ;
Tracet | Tracet
0°04 0:07
Present) Absent
Absent | Present
” Absent
100°34 | 100°28
*02
100°34 | 100°26
2611 2°600
III.,
fLless than 0°01%
Nelson’s Head;
Round Head; VII., Fingal Head;
186 C. A. SUSSMILCH AND W. A. GREIG.
Megascopic Characters—The rock is black in colour
when fresh, with a vitreous lustre, and contains an abun-
dance of phenocrysts of quartz and felspar.
Microscopic Characters.—The groundmass is quite glassy
and displays a well-marked flow structure. In this ground-
mass there is set an abundance of large phenocrysts of
quartz, plagioclase, orthoclase and biotite. The quartz.
phenocrysts are relatively large, show marked corrosion,
and are frequently cracked and broken, but show no strain
structure. The plagioclase is tabular in habit, is perfectly
fresh and free from alteration, and displays well-marked
albite twinning. It is an acid oligoclase with a composition
of about Ab,» An;. Some of the plagioclase crystals are
fractured. The orthoclase is quite fresh, but is less abun-
dant than the plagioclase. Biotite is not nearly so abundant
as the other minerals, and is also quite fresh.
b. The Inthoidal Toscanite.
This is the dominant lava of the district, individual
flows ranging up to at least 1,000 feet in thickness. From
all the many occurrences the rock is quite similar both in
its megascopic and microscopical characters.
Megascopic Characters—The colour of the mass varies.
from pale pink to slate blue, according to the state of
preservation; except where the rock has been quarried, it
is difficult to obtain really fresh samples. This rock is.
crowded with phenocrysts of quartz and felspar, the latter’
usually being red or pink, or more rarely white. In hand
specimens the rock looks like a typical quartz-phorphyry.
Microscopical Characters.—The groundmass is variable,
usually eryptocrystalline to glassy, and some specimens,
notably some from Soldiers Point, have a micro-crystalline
geroundmass which consists of an aggregate of small erystals
of quartz and felspar, sometimes showing micrographic
GEOLOGY OF PORT STEPHENS. 187
structure. Flow structure similar to that which occurs in
the glassy variety is present in many specimens, and in
some of the slides the rock appears to have been originally
glassy and to have subsequently become more or less devi-
trified. At Nelson’s Head there is no sharp line of demar-
cation between the two varieties, the glassy variety merging
upwards into the lithoidal variety. The phenocrysts.
consist of quartz, plagioclase, orthoclase and biotite similar
to those occurring in the glassy variety, except that all the
minerals other than quartz show considerable alteration.
The orthoclase is much kaolinized. The plagioclase exhibits.
saussuritization and, much more rarely, ‘aolinization; in
some slides the centre zones of some few crystals have been
replaced by chlorite, but this is not common; the biotite
is commonly bleached. The question as to whether the
alteration of the felspars in the lthoidal lavas of the
Kuttung series is deuteritic or not has been fully discussed
by G. D. Osborne+ when describing these lavas from the
Paterson district, and this question, therefore, will not be
discussed here; but it is worthy of note that the alteration
of the felspars in the lithoidal toscanites is in marked
contrast to their freshness in the glassy toscanites. Com-
plete analyses of the two varieties of toscanite are given
in Table I, together with two partial analyses. It will be
seen that the glassy variety is lower in soda and potash,
but higher in lime than in the lithoidal variety, but it is.
only in the case of the potash that the difference is well
marked. The norms of the two varieties, as calculated from
the analyses are as follows :-—
Glassy Variety. lLithoidal Variety.
UT) a 36.96% 34.44%
WriMOClaSe sk... 15.00% 27.84%
BCS ls ws sieve eee 28.82% 26.20%
PeMOrtMIGe ok 8.62% 4.73%
Femic Minerals ..... 2.74% 2.96%
ton Ores i... 26.6... 2.96% 3.00%
188 C. A. SUSSMILCH AND W. A. GREIG.
It will be seen that in both cases the plagioclase
(oligoclase) preponderates over the orthoclase. The
magmatic name of the glassy variety in the American
classification is Tehamose. It might be pointed out, how-
ever, that this rock falls almost on the border line which
separates the orders columbare and britannare in that
classification, and consequently it is very close to toscanose,
the magma to which the lithoidal variety belongs. Both
magmas are domalkalic and sodi-potassic. Some petrolo-
gists would prefer to call these rocks Dellenites on account
of the acid nature of the plagioclase. The lithoidal variety
is not far removed from the Rhyolites (Liparose).
3.—The Rhyolites.
The main rhyolite flow (No. 3 flow) occurring at Fingal
Head, Morna Point and Tilligherry Creek is indistinguish-
able in hand specimens from the toscanites. Under the
microscope also the two rocks are quite similar, the only
noticeable difference being a higher proportion of ortho-
clase in the rhyolites. Two analyses of the rhyolite have
been made, one taken from near the base of the flow at
Fingal Head, the other taken from near the top of the flow
at Morna Point. These analyses are shown in Table I.
‘The norms, as calculated from these two analyses, are as
follows :—
Fingal Head. Morna Point.
Mwart,. Age see ee 34.14% 34.86 %
Wrthoclase Weg een ee 29.46% 30.58%
BASIE i.e aiavcsets oe wearer eee 27.24% 25.15%
PNMON EGE! see oe ane Maes ee 3.05% 3.61%
Meme Mamerals .. 9.3205... 2.89% 2.10%
ron/Oxides: |. ¥ os: 4... eae LT a7 1.92%
In the American classification the magmatic name would
be Liparose, almost on the border line between Liparose
and Omeose. In comparing these norms with that of the
GEOLOGY OF PORT STEPHENS. 189
lithoidal toscanite, the only difference is a small increase
in the proportion of orthoclase as compared with
plagioclase in the rhyolites. |
The other rhyolite flows occurring below the main flow
at Tilligherry Creek have not been analysed, no specimens
sufficiently fresh for that purpose being available. The
No. 1 flow, which is pink in colour, consists mainly of
a felsitic groundmass through which are scattered a few
felspar phenocrysts. In the microslides the groundmass
is seen to be eryptocrystalline, but part, if not all, of this
sroundmass appears to have been originally glassy, with
well-marked flow structure. The few felspar phenocrysts
are much altered and consist mainly of plagioclase,
although orthoclase is also present. The true nature of
this rock has not been determined, it has only been placed
with the rhyolites provisionally. The No. 2 flow from
Tilligherry Creek, although somewhat finer grained, is in
all respects similar to the main rhyolite flow (No. 3 flow),
and does not need separate description.
4.—Sequence of Eruption of the Flows.
This is left somewhat in doubt owing to the uncertainty
as to the true nature of the mode of occurrence of the
andesite which occurs at Stephens Head. As has already
been pointed out, this occurrence may be either:
(a) A lava cone of the same age of extrusion as the
andesites at the base of the series, and which was.
subsequently surrounded and finally submerged
by the later toscanite and rhyolite flows, or
(b) A lava flow poured out after the toscanites, but
before the rhyolites.
If the first interpretation is the correct one, then we
have in the Kuttung Series of the Port Stephens district
a series of lava flows beginning with andesites, followed
190 C. A. SUSSMILCH AND W. A. GREIG.
‘by toseanites and a final outpouring of rhyolites. The
rocks analysed are arranged in this order in Table I, and
an examination of the analyses will show the following
points of interest :— |
1. The silica percentage shows a progressive increase
ranging from 63.17 per cent. to 74.74 per cent.
2. The soda percentage remains fairly constant, but
decreases shghtly towards the end of the series.
3. The potash shows a progressive increase ranging
from 0.66 per cent. at the beginning of the series
to 5.23 per cent. at the end of the series.
4. The basic oxides (CaO, MgO, and FeO) all show
progressive decreases from the beginning to the
end of the series.
These facts would indicate that at the beginning of the
Kuttung vulecanicity in this district the feeding reservoir
contained a magma of andesitic composition, but that, as
a result possibly of gravitational sinking of the more basic
minerals, as cooling and crystallisation progressed, the
magma in the upper part of the reservoir became pro-
gressively more acid, and thus the eruption of andesites
was followed later by the eruption of toscanites, and these
later were followed by the eruption of the rhyolites. It
is worthy of note that, soon after the close of the Kuttung
period of vuleanicity, an extensive series of basic lavas
(natrolite basalt) was erupted in this same district and
forms part of the Lower Marine Series which overlie the
Kuttung Series. These basalts may be taken to represent
the basic portion which accumulated in the lower part of
the magma reservoir, whose final eruption completed the
cycle.
If, on the other hand, the andesites of Stephens Head
xepresent a lava flow poured out after the toscanites, then
S jie
byal Society of V.S.W., Vol. LXII., 1928. Plate XVI,
Hawks Nest
SS
a)
Cabbage Tree
yes Island
= -
> NORTH HEAD
(Yacaaba) Bent
Boondelbah
N HO
Island
al Bay <=) SOUTH HEAD
i Y (Tomeree)
ab ion hS
@ Shark.
oN STEPHENS
~
3
S
aS
; Oe pt
Burind/ beds and Wallarabba conglomerates.
Andesites and associated strata
Toscani€es
a Rhyolites and associated strata
paren Recent alluvium and sand dunes.
———— faults
: SCALE OF MILES
0 ye) 1 2 4
Ken. Craigie.
Journal Royal Society of N.S.W., Vol. LXII., 1928.
7, ae) North Arm ach eS TEA GARDENS O
Co ‘ i ,
OQ ue Ls SS UE 5O Duck Hole GreenPt.
Gardenl. ———>=/* %, XG y
Riv?
BAROMA PT
Fame Cove se ii
FAME ?——<———>
NORTH P®
oe
OneTreel.8 —. SOLDIER PT N. = NORTH HEAD
oaky | STEPHENS 3 (aeaaba)
a -
KANGAROO Pt kh, /
/_.NELSON HP
te SOUTH HEAD
2, CORLETTE te (Tomeree)
ROUND HP gb Ye
; aN jLSON BAY
= Uo
i Ganghan Hill @ Shark.
ASSL ane
! POINT STEPHENS
fesse ®
Pig Island +
[acne AnnaB
ch eos SSR a aaa, meen tt -AO}-=> Seca
4
Mi
ay ‘
3tFE ttt H
aad
Toscani€es
; - ———— Faults
Bight MORNA POINT d SCALE OF MILES
castle fo} 2 1 2
New
jes Cabbage Tree
POR push &® Middle |
Plate X VI,
Island
Little
Bl.
PACIFIC
Burindi beds and Wallarabba conglomerates.
Andesites and associated strata
A ~Ahyolites and associated strata
L_] Recent alluvium and sand dunes.
4
Ken. Craigie.
Geological Map, Port Stephens District,
Senekeeey
cert
eS orm ate teenagers copie a arenes co
*
TNR ic ee
epee an
Sere
r)
4
be
E
lc caeceenle a ae mel
oe
ta
st er
suas minabaeeaiberahee’
sie agscee ps eme pein nee ART
GEOLOGY OF PORT STEPHENS. roy
we get the following order of extrusion for the Kuttung
lavas: (1) andesites, (2) toscanites, (3) andesites, (4)
rhyolites. This is a similar order of extrusion to that
which occurs in the Kuttung Series at Eelah. So far as
the Port Stephens area, however, is concerned, we are of
opinion that interpretation (a) is the correct one and that
the lavas became progressively more acid as they were
erupted.
REFERENCES.
1.—Geology of The Hunter River Coal Measures of N.S.
Wales, by Prof. T. W. E. David, B.A., F.R.S., F.G.S. Memoir
No. 4, Dept. of Mines, Sydney, 1907.
2.—Outline of the Main Topographic Features of N.S. Wales,
by C. A. Sussmilch, F.G.S., F.T.C.(Syd.). Proc., Pan Pacific
Science Congress, Australia, 1923.
3.—Sequence, Glaciation and Correlation of the Carboniferous
Rocks of The Hunter River District, N.S. Wales, by C. A.
Sussmilch, F.G.S., F.T.C., and Prof. T. W. E. David, C.M.G.,
D.S.0., B.A., F.R.S. Proc., Royal Society of N.S. Wales, Vol.
LIII., 1919.
4.—Geology and Petrology of the Clarencetown-Paterson
District, Part IV., Petrography by G. Osborne, B.Sc. Proc.,
Linnean Society of N.S. Wales, Vol. L., p. 2, 1925.
5.—On the Hypersthene-Andesite of Blair Duguid, near Al-
landale, N.S. Wales, by W. R. Browne, D.Sc., and H. P. White,
F.C.S. Proc., Royal Society of N.S. Wales, Vol. LX., 1926.
192 R. H CAMBAGE.
THE OUTBREAK OF SPRINGS IN AUTUMN.
By R. H. Campacg, C.B.E., F.L.S.
(Read before the Royal Society of New South Wales, Sept. 5, 1928.)
The outbreak of springs in New South Wales between
the months of February and June usually passes unnoticed
excepting during drought seasons, when various reports of
the occurrence are made to the press; but if an increased
flow of water is observed in any of the streams after even
a very slight fall of rain, this increase is generally
attributed to the rainfall and no remarks are made. The
theory advanced in this paper is that at least ninety per
cent. of these outbursts or stimulated flows which occur
when no rain falls are caused by a decrease in evaporation
or lowering of atmospheric temperature, and that the
phenomenon is in evidence after the heat of summer has
passed, or after a sudden drop in temperature for a few
days, but is more noticeable in the absence of rainfall.
A short note which I contributed on the subject was
published in “‘The Surveyor’’ in June, 1897,* and in
September, 1897, the late W. E. Abbott read a valuable
paper on the question before this Society.t In both of
these contributions the cause of the outbursts was attri-
buted to diminishing evaporation. The object of the
present paper is to record the result of further investiga-
tions into the matter.
*“The Surveyor,” 1897, 10, No. 6, 144.
+ This Journal, 1897, 31, 201. See also “Report on the Water
Resources of the Hunter Valley,” 1908, by J. B. Henson,
Assoc.M.Inst.C.E. (Hunter District Water Supply and Sewerage
Board). The report was received after this paper was read.
OUTBREAK OF SPRINGS IN AUTUMN. 193
My first observation on this subject was made in
December, 1890, where there was a small swamp in the
Walcha district, and every morning a little stream was
flowing freely from it, but by each evening all water had
disappeared from the tiny stream. I have noticed the
same feature many times since then, and similar observa-
tions have been made by bushmen on innumerable occasions.
During a dry period in 1897, my assistant, Mr. R. G.
Wilson, drew my attention to the fact that all the cases
of increased flow which we had noticed during our survey-
ing operations in the Bathurst to Harden district originated
in swamps. |
It does not appear that barometric changes of pressure
cause these outbursts of springs, for, as Mr. Abbott points
out, this would require a high pressure at the source of the
spring and a low pressure at its outlet. It would not be
possible to get this difference of pressure in such a short
distance as that comprised in the length or width of one
of these water-supplying swamps, which are often only a
few hundred yards or, at most, a few miles in extent.
The theory that the dry weather cracks the ground and
releases impounded water is by no means universally
accepted, because in an ordinary case the ground will not
erack while it remains moist. Mr. Abbott cites the case of
a surface dam, and states that while it contains any water
the outside of the dam will not crack, even in dry, hot
weather.
On the other hand, Mr. E. T. Webb, of Bathurst, wrote
to me in April, 1923, as follows:—‘‘In a dry time some
years ago a crack came in the ground on the side of a hill
about 8 miles from the town, and after a time moisture
came up through the crack, and when the moisture had
softened the ground the water commenced to run—this in
M—September 5, 1928.
“194 R. H. CAMBAGE.
hot weather, and in a place where there had been no spring
before.’”’
I do not know the local conditions surrounding this ease,
but it is conceivable that a slight earth movement or
partial landslide on the side of a hill might result in
releasing some water, or cause its course to be diverted.
Mr. Webb also wrote: ‘‘Now my theory is this, that in
different localities the nature of soil and subsoil is different
and therefore different causes operate. Here it is prin-
cipally granite country with clay subsoil; hence, as a
spring gets weak the small particles of granite which are
coming along the channel gradually stop the opening until
no water will percolate through; the water then commences
to accumulate at the back until the pressure is sufficient to
clear the opening.”’
No doubt something of this nature happens at times,
but only in a small way, and is of a local nature; whereas
an increase in the flow of various streams appears to be
more or less of a regular character during some portion
of the autumn. In reply to my question in March, 1928,
the manager of Springfield, in the Orange district, stated
that the water generally increases in Lewis Ponds Creek
in or about May, even if no rain falls.
I was informed that without any rain having fallen the
‘water commenced to flow in Molong Creek near the town
of Molong, on the 9th or 10th April, 1923. Prior to this
the creek had stopped running owing to dry weather.
Springs and their Variation.
On the western slopes of New South Wales, where many
of these springs occur, there are three different sets of
conditions. One is in the northern portion where the
steeply-dipping rocks convey the rain-water westerly to a
OUTBREAK OF SPRINGS IN AUTUMN. 195
great depth, where it is overlain by impervious strata, and
impounded. This artesian water is reached by boring,
‘when it comes to the surface as the result of pressure.
The second condition is found towards the foot of the
western slopes, where rain-water disappears by soakage in
fairly level country with a considerable amount of alluvium,
and this water may not find an outlet, but as sub-artesian
water may be brought to the surface by windmills or other
methods of pumping.
The third case, which is that now under consideration,
is where the rain or snow falls on elevated country and
then finds its way into the soil which acts as an under-
ground reservoir, which in ordinary years is kept practi-
eally full. The small outlets through which the water
escapes are called springs, and while there is a quantity
of water in the soil or reservoir these springs may continue
to flow, even if no rain falls. Near the outlet the ground
becomes spongy, and the water, to some extent by capillary
attraction, rises to the surface and forms swampy areas of
various dimensions. As the summer advances and evapo-
ration increases, there often comes a time when the evapo-
ration, which may continue day and night, claims all the
water on the surface, and leaves none to flow into the
stream below. The spring is then said to be dry.
There are two conditions which may operate to start
the spring flowing again. One is the falling of sufficient
rain to replenish the reservoir so that it will be able to
force out more water than can be at once evaporated, in
which case some will flow away, and the occurrence will
eall for no public remarks. The second ease is one that
may happen with or without rainfall, and is caused by
a lowering of atmospheric temperature with a consequent
diminution of evaporation. When the outburst happens
196 R. H. CAMBAGE.
in drought time, as the result of diminishing evaporation.
only, there is considerable comment, and the phenomenon
is regarded by some casual thinkers as an indication that
the drought will soon terminate, and by others that it will
continue. The little rills which issue from the various.
springs and other moist places all unite, and cause a defi-
nite flow in the streams into which they drain, and this.
flow sometimes continues for very many miles.
Should an intermittent spring, fed by rainfall and with-
out a storage reservoir, be situated a great distance from
its source of supply, the water might take some months
following an underground course to reach the outlet, in
which case it is possible that the outbreak would occur
during a dry period without being the result of diminished
evaporation.
Evaporation.
The late H. C. Russell, F.R.S. carried out a consider-
able amount of investigation on the question of evapora-
tion in New South Wales, and records an instance at Lake
George in March, 1885, where in three days, while a nor-
therly wind was blowing, the lake lost one and a half inches
by evaporation.* Lake George is given as roughly 20 miles.
long and 5 miles wide.
Mr. Russell carried out various evaporation tests at
Sydney during the year 1885. ‘‘Two dishes, each 8 inches
deep and 2 feet on each side, that is, exposing 4 squars
feet of surface, were used for the purpose of testing the
amount of water evaporated from soil, grass covered and
bare . . .The evaporation from these dishes was tested
by weighing once a day.’’** The daily mean in inches for
the year was, grass covered 0.083, bare earth 0.071, water
0.100.
* This Journ. 1885, 19, 24.
* “Rain and River Observations made in New South Wales,
1885,” by H. C. Russell, C.M.G. (Government Printer).
OUTBREAK OF SPRINGS IN AUTUMN. 197
Mr. Russell wrote:—‘‘The amount of evaporation de-
pends very much upon the state of the soil; if it is wet on
the surface the evaporation goes on from it much faster
than from water; but as the ground dries the condition
is reversed and the earth evaporates less than the water
. .The grass brings the subsoil water to the surface and
aids evaporation in very dry weather, so that the evapora-
tion from grassed soil is more regular than from bare soil,
and in the course of the year it loses more than the dry
earth by 20 per cent.; but in comparing it with water it
evaporates 14 per cent. less.”’
The total evaporation for Sydney in 1885 is given as
36.514 inches, the monthly mean being 3.043. The lowest
is given as 1.669 for July, and the highest as 4.683 inches
for January.
The mean monthly evaporation at Bourke was 5.174
inches for the months April to December (inclusive), 1885,
the lowest being 1.963 for July, and the highest 9.308
inches for December, the average evaporation per day
being given as 0.169.
Atmospheric Effect on Flow from Springs at Kosciusko.
On the 16th and 17th February, 1920, two small swamps
were noticed to be feeding tiny rills which were finding
their way along the gutter on the roadside a short dis-
tance above the hotel, at an elevation of a little more than
5000 feet above sea-level. From sunrise until about 2.30
p.m. the sun shone full upon the road, but after this the
springs and small streams came within the shadow of the
mountain. The effect of diminishing evaporation was very
clearly manifest on the flow of water as soon as it came
within the shadow.
In the case of No. 1 stream, which was the more feeble
of the two, it was found to extend 66 yards along the
roadside from its source at 2.45 p.m., while at 5.45 p.m.
198 R. H. CAMBAGE.
its length was 76 yards, but during the night, and at 7.30’
a.m. the following morning it reached 92 yards from its
source, and disappeared in the sand near a gully into
which it doubtless found its way. During the whole of
the following forenoon the length of the little rill was.
gradually shortened by evaporation, until again it reached
only about 66 yards from its source.
No. 2 stream was fed from a little swamp about 50 feet
by 20 feet, and extended 160 yards from its source at 2.30%
p.m., while at 7.20 a.m. the following morning it reached
252 yards, or an additional 92 yards, and disappeared.
under a culvert. The evaporation from the heat of the
sun operated on it so that by 10.5 a.m. it had receded 56:
yards, and 88 yards by 12.25 p.m. and the volume in the
little stream itself was much reduced.
Atmospheric Effect on Flow at Mittagong.
Water is impounded under large masses of basalt on the:
Mittagong Range, and finds its way out at various points.
where it forms swampy areas and springs. In May, 1923,
a farm on the side of the range was visited, and it was.
found that the water for the stock was brought about 300:
yards in a pipe one and a half inches in diameter from
one of these springs which was open to the full rays of
the sun. The farmer’s statement was that during the sum-.
mer months there was usually a full flow throughout the
night and in the morning, but this would decrease towards
the afternoon of a moderately hot day and perhaps cease
at about 5 p.m., while on a very hot day the flow would.
cease altogether at about 2 p.m., though it would probably
start again sometime during the evening. On one exceed--
ingly hot day the water ceased and did not flow again un--
til the following morning, when the weather was much
cooler. This variation in flow clearly seems to be in res--
ponse to variation in evaporation.
= Ita cealal
OUTBREAK OF SPRINGS IN AUTUMN. 199
In June, 1923, it was found that the water from this
spring had continued to run, day and night, since early
in April, but as evidence that a spring without being re-
plenished is not inexhaustible, the volume had become so
reduced owing to continued dry weather that a one inch
pipe was sufficient to carry off the water in June.
An Outburst at Bathurst in Dry Weather.
On the 25th February, 1923, a message was sent from
Bathurst to the Sydney press as follows:—‘‘ What are re-
garded as signs of a continuance of the drought is the fact
that in several portions of the Bathurst district springs
have broken out and are running strongly. Vale Creek,
which has been dry since last storm has now two inches of
water running, as the result of the springs.’’
As it was thought that this outbreak of springs was con-
sequent upon a fall of temperature having occurred some
little time earher, I recently obtained, through the kindness
of Mr. KH. W. Timcke, acting Meteorologist in charge of
the Sydney Weather Bureau, the Bathurst temperature
figures for the period in question, and they disclose a fall
of 16 degrees from the 15th to the 16th February, 1923.
When it is remembered that some days would elapse from
the time the spring began to flow until it reached and was
noticed some distance down the ereek, it seems fair to as-
sume that this particular outbreak was the result of a fall
of temperature and a diminution of evaporation. How
long this flow continued I am unable to say, but the re-
turning heat probably soon terminated it.
It may be noted that on the 16th February, when the
maximum temperature fell from 89 to 73 degrees, and the
minimum fell as low as 47 degrees, the wind was from the
east, and would contain more humidity and less evapora-
ting properties than a wind coming to the Bathurst district
from the west or north.
200 R. H. CAMBAGE.
The temperatures in question are given below.
Bathurst Minimum Maximum
February, 1928. Degrees. Degrees. Wind 9 a.m.
12 50 88 calm clear
13 56 83 east light clear
14 ays) 90 east light clear
15 59 89 calm cloudy
16 ayy) 73 east light overcast
17. AT 86 calm few clouds
18 54 94 calm cloudy
19 De 95 calm clear
20 56 90 calm clear
2il o4 98 east light clear
22 64 96 calm cloudy
23 Be 101 calm fine
24 64 102 ealm fine
20 67 98 calm fine
On the 17th April, 1923, a message was sent to the press
from Bathurst stating that ‘‘Springs have broken out at
the head of the Fish River, and a strong stream of clear
water is now running into the Macquarie’’. An examina-
tion of the temperature figures at the Sydney Weather
Bureau shows that the average maximum temperature at
Bathurst from the first to the 17th April, 1923, was 72
degrees, but that on the 8th and 9th April the maximum
was 64 and 65 degrees respectively. This fall in the tem-
perature was probably responsible for the stream which
a week later had reached the Macquarie.
There seems nothing remarkable in the fact that springs
may start to flow on or after about the middle of April
even in a drought period, for the rate of evaporation has
eonsiderably diminished by this time, and, even without
any rain having fallen, it is not unusual to see a creek,
which heads in a swamp, flowing more freely in May than
in March.
It does not appear that the outbreak of springs in dry
weather has any bearing on the duration of a drought.
NEW SPECIES OF EUCALYPTUS AND ACACIA. 201
DESCRIPTION OF
THREE NEW SPECIES OF EUCALYPTUS AND
ONE ACACIA.
By W. F. BLAKELY.
Assistant Botanist, National Herbarium, Sydney.
(With Plates XVII.-XX.)
“(Read before the Royal Society of New South Wales, Oct. 3, 1928.)
EUCALYPTUS JOYCEAE, N.Sp.
Arbor ad 20-60 pedes alta, nonnumquam duabus aut pluribus
-stirpibus a basi emergentibus; cortex asper, per pedes plures
‘persistens, levis et deciduus in superiori trunco et in ramis;
folia juvenilia pluribus parvibus opposita, orbicularia, elliptica
-vel late lanceolata, breviter petiolata, 4-5 x 2.5-4 cm.; folia
adultiora alternata, petiolata, lanceolata vel obliquo-falcata,
-eoriacea, frequentibus glandulis punctiformibus, 6-18 x 2-3 cm.;
-vernatio subconspicna, venae laterales ex angulo 30-40°
surgentes a costa media; inflorescentia umbellis axillaribus 7-15
florum; gemmae clavatae, acutae, pedicellatae; calyx calathi-
formis circiter 3 mm. altus; operculum conicum vel fere
rostratum; antherae reniformes; capsulae pyriformes vel fere
pilulares, truncatae 5-7 x 6-8 mm.; ligum durum, fulvum vel
‘badium.
A tree 20-60 feet high, sometimes Mallee-like, with two
or more stems branching from the base, 1-2 feet in
diameter. Barks persistent, light grey, coarsely flaky-
fibrous for 6-12 feet, then smooth, deciduous, white or
mottled on the remainder of the trunk and branches, and
with the characteristic marking of EH. haemastoma or E.
micrantha.
Juvenile leaves rather thin, the first three or four alter-
nate, sueceeded by three or more pairs in the opposite
‘Stage, obicular, elliptical to broadly lanceolate, very shortly
petiolate, 4-5 em. long, 2.5-4 em. broad; venation somewhat
202 W. F. BLAKELY.
fine, the numerous lateral veins much branched, especially
in the orbicular leaves; intramarginal nerve distant from.
the edge.
Intermediate leaves broadly lanceolate to obliquely-
lanceolate, acuminate, shortly petiolate, 7-13 em. long, 4-8:
cm. broad; venation moderately distinct on both surfaces,
the lateral veins 18 to 23 on each side of the prominent
midrib, somewhat irregular and diverging at an angle of
40-50° with the midrib; intramarginal vein distant from
the slightly thickened revolute margin.
Adult leaves alternate, moderately thick, glossy, with
numerous oil-dots, petiolate, lanceolate to obliquely-falcate-
lanceolate, acuminate, 6-18 em. long, 2-3 em. broad; vena-
tion somewhat distinct, the lateral veins rather fine, mak-.
ing an angle of 30-40° to the midrib; intramarginal vein
usually distant from the edge.
Inflorescence in axillary umbels or sub-paniculate owing
to the suppression of the upper leaves; peduncles slightly
compressed, somewhat slender, up to 2 em. long. Buds.
clavate, acute, 7-15 in the head, distinctly pedicellate, the
pedicels at first shghtly angular, but as the fruit develops:
becoming rather slender and terete, 5-7 mm. long. Calyx
somewhat goblet-shaped, about 3 mm. deep, 4 mm. across.
the top; operculum conical to almost rostrate, sometimes.
longer than the calyx-tube. Filaments white, all antheri-
ferous. Anthers small, reniform, usually with a terminal
oland.
Fruit pedicellate, pyriform to nearly pilular 5-7 x 6-8
mm. truncate, slightly contracted at the top. Dise usually
forming a thin downward sloping reddish ring over the
basal portion of the valves, but sometimes almost flush.
with the edge of the ecalycine ring; valves usually 4,.
invariably inclosed owing to the declivity of the capsular
dise, which is most marked in some specimens.
NEW SPECIES OF EUCALYPTUS AND ACACIA. 203:
Timber brown to reddish brown, darker than that of
E. piperita and E. Considemana, moderately hard and
interlocked, with the characteristic gum veins of the above
species. On the whole, it is harder and probably more:
durable than the timber of its congeners. For fuel pur-
poses it is better than the timber of EF. piperita.
Type from about one mile south of Kariong Trig
Wondabyne, New South Wales (D. W. C. Shiress and
Wit /B.).
The tree in the field conveys the impression of being
intermediate between E. haemastoma and E. piperita, as:
it partakes of the cortical characters of both species, while
the buds and fruits resemble those of the former, and the
timber approaches more closely to that of the latter.
E. Joyceae is unique in that it connects the Pepper-
mints with two Renantherous White Gums with red
timber, namely, H. haemastoma and E. micrantha, which.
were tentatively placed in the Renantherae, apparently
without any very close affinities, especially as regards the
timber. But E. Joyceae appears to bridge the gap, not
only in the colour of the timber, but also in other morpho-
logical characters, which, when carefully studied in
conjunction with those of its allies seem to define more
clearly its natural genetical relationship with the above-
mentioned groups.
Named in memory of my adopted daughter Joyce, who,.
before her untimely death, assisted me in many little
ways with my botanical work.
Range.
It appears to be confined to the Hawkesbury sandstone,
between Parramatta and Gosford, singly or in small
clumps, but, so far, I have not succeeded in finding its.
optimum. It is, however, more plentiful on the northern.
"204 W. F. BLAKELY.
‘side of the Hawkesbury River than on the southern side,
and I predict that when it is better known its range will
probably extend as far as Brisbane, Queensland.
The localities south of the Hawkesbury are—Parramatta,
“**Half-barked variety of White Gum’’ (Rev. Dr. W. W.
Woolls). The fruits are broad and truncate, with a well-
defined disc. Near the Suspension Bridge, North Sydney
(D. W. C. Shiress). Stony Creek Road, about half-way
between Pymble and De Burgh’s Bridge (C. T. White
cand W.F.B.). When Mr. White’s attention was drawn
to the tree, he intimated that it resembled a tree growing
around Brisbane. About one mile east of Wahroonga
Railway Station, on the edge of the shale, where it grows
into shaft-like trees, in association with EH. micrantha, E.
Sieberiana, FE. corymbosa, and E. resinifera (W.F.B.) ;
‘near the old Wool-wash, Spring Gully Creek, 1 mile east
of Hornsby, and about + mile north of Junction Road;
also 4 mile west of the latter locality; between Collings
Street and Junction Road (W.F.B.). On the track to
‘Gibberygong Creek, Kuring-gai Chase, near the descent
‘to the Bogey Hole (W.F.B.). Hill 60, about 1 mile north
-of Cowan; also on the east side of Cowan Tunnel, and
on the top of the Tunnel (D. W. C. Shiress and W.F.B.) ;
near the 26-mile post Cowan, twin trees 30 feet high, one
foot in diameter. Bark rough at base for 6-10 feet, then
‘smooth and blotched like the bark of E. haemastoma, for
-which it could easily be mistaken were it not for the
‘rough, flaky bark at base, and the Peppermint-like odour
of the leaves when crushed. The fruits are larger than
‘the type, and about the same size as those of the co-type.
Localities North of the Hawkesbury.—Two trees found
by D.W.C.S. and W.F.B. at the head of the long swamp,
‘two miles north of Wondabyne; and two more on the
‘rocks overlooking Mooney Mooney, about 4 mile north of
NEW SPECIES OF EUCALYPTUS AND ACACIA. 205-
the first locality. There is also a large tree in an open
gully, about 3 mile north of the second locality, and two:
more trees, one on each side of the Wallaby Rocks, + mile:
east of the latter locality. All are small trees except one,
with a little rough bark at base, and with the upper por-
tion of the stems and branches smooth and white. About
one mile south of Kariong Trig., on a rather exposed
plateau about 700 feet above sea level, are nine trees,
ranging from 40-60 feet high, and from 12 to 24 inches.
in diameter, all of which have rough bark at base and
smooth bark on the branches. These may be regarded as.
the Type (D.W.C.S. and W.F.B.). On the Woy Woy-
Gosford Road, about one mile from the junction of the
new Wiseman’s Ferry Road; also by the side of the new
Sydney-Neweastle Road, about one mile below the junction.
of the former road.
A little below the junction of the old Wiseman’s Ferry
Road and the old road leading to the Industrial Home
for Boys, Penang Range, near Gosford, are six trees
ranging from 25 to 60 feet in height, and from 9-24 inches.
in diameter. They have the characteristic persistent rough
bark at the base, smooth upper stems and branches as the
Kariong trees. The largest, and probably the oldest, tree
appears to be a very great age, and has indications of
having weathered many storms and bush fires. In fact,
nearly all the trees of H. Joyceae are severely charred and
burnt to almost a shell at the base, and in some cases
the original tree is burnt right out, and from the thin
shell fresh shoots have sprung up and developed into:
lofty trees.
About 8 miles from Gosford, on the top of Penang
Ranges. This specimen is recorded in error by J. H.
Maiden in Proce. Linn. Soc., N.S.W., Vol. XXV., p. 109:
(1900), as EH. stricta, and as EH. Consideniana, Maiden,.
206 - W. F, BLAKELY.
le, Vol. XXIX., p. 477 (1904), and is figured in error
under H. Considemana in the Critical Revision of the
Genus Eucalyptus, Part X., Plate 46, figs. 9a, 9b, and
referred to on page 314 as follows—Penang , Mountain,
Gosford (J.H.M. and J. L. Boorman), ‘“*Very like a
Peppermint in appearance, only the bark is not so stringy
—more flaky, white smooth limbs. A fair-sized tree and
scarce (Andrew Murphy).’’ Co-type. At the bottom of
page 315, Mr. Maiden, when discussing EH. Sieberrana and
E. Consideniana, again refers to it, 1e., ‘‘The Penang
fruits are not perfectly typical; they show more than
ordinary resemblance to H. Sieberiana.’’ The fruits are
not quite ripe, hence the very sharp rim which is due to
the undeveloped state of the capsular dise. 3
Affinities.
1. With E. haemastoma Sm.
Trees of EH. Joyceae could very easily be mistaken for
E. haemastoma, as the cortical characters of the upper
portion of the trunk and branches of both species are
almost identical, except that the markings of EH. Joyceae
are less blotchy and greener, and are usually in broad
irregular stripes, which is mainly due to the fact that
the smooth bark decorticates annually in broad ribbons
2-10 feet long. While the bark of E. haemastoma. sheds
in small, broad flakes, rarely exceeding 12 inches long;
it is also different in texture, being soft and brittle.
The juvenile leaves of both species are broad, but those
of EL. haemastoma are much broader and coarser than the
leaves of EH. Joyceae; while there is also an almost total
absence of aromatic oil in the leaves of the former, it is
always markedly present in leaves of the latter.
The adult leaves of both present the same general facies,
but the leaves of EH. Joyceae are, on the whole, smaller
and less coriaceous than those of HE. haemastoma, and, on
NEW SPECIES OF EUCALYPTUS AND ACACIA. 207
the other hand, they are furnished with more oil dots than
the leaves of its ally.
The buds of EL. Joyceae differ from those of HF. haemas-
toma in being more acute or rostrate. As regards the
fruits, they are somewhat similar in size and shape in
both species, but the capsular dise of HE. Joyceae is invari-
ably more oblique, while the pedicels are frequently longer
and more slender than those of H. haemastoma.
The timber of EH. Joyceae is brown to reddish-brown,
hard, and close grained; that of H. haemastoma is red,
moderately soft and brittle.
2. With E. piperita Sm.
Some trees of EH. Joyceae, especially those with the
rough, persistent. bark extending almost to the large
branches would pass for this species. But an examination
of the buds, fruits, juvenile leaves, and a closer scrutiny
of the cortical characters of the latter will readily show
that, although at first sight they appear to be alike, there
is a marked difference between them when they are care-
fully investigated.
For instance, the persistent bark of H. Joyceae is more
coarsely fibrous and of a yellowish-grey colour, while the
smooth deciduous bark is whiter and sheds in longer and
broader strips. The juvenile leaves are at least a size
larger, more broadly lanceolate, and thicker than those of
L. pyperrta. The buds of #. Joyceae are relatively larger,
and the fruits also differ in shape, size and texture from
those of its ally.
3. With H. Bottw Blakely.
The large fruits of this species somewhat resemble those
of #. Joyceae; and there is also a general similarity in
the juvenile and intermediate leaves. On the other hand,
208 W. F. BLAKELY.
E. Bottu grows to a much larger tree, and its persistent
rough bark usually extends well out on the branches.
4. With E. Consideniana Maiden.
E. Joyceae is not unlike E. Considenana as regards size
and habit, but the persistent, rough bark of the former
does not extend to the tips of the branches like that of
the latter. The timber of H. Joyceae is darker and harder,
while the buds are more acute, and the fruit is thinner
and slightly different in shape. The juvenile leaves also
differ from those of EL. Considemana in being less glaucous.
Description of Seedlings.
Hypocotyl slender, terete, purple-brown. Cotyledons
reniform, somewhat unequally lobed, tapering into a long
petiole, 7 x 5 mm., dark green above, purple-brown
beneath.
Ist pair of leaves opposite, petiolate, oblong-lanceolate,
2 em. long, 9 mm. broad, dark green above, purple-brown
beneath; veins obscure. 2nd pair of leaves opposite,
shortly petiolate, oblong, or nearly so, 4.5 x 2 em., light
green above, pale beneath. 8rd pair of leaves opposite,
curved inward with shorter petioles than in the preceding
pair, oblong-lanceolate, 7.5 x 2.3 em.; venation obscure
above, prominent beneath. 4th pair of leaves similar to
the 3rd pair, but much longer with a broader base, 9.7 x
3.5 em.; upper surface dark green, veins obscure; lower
surface pale green; lateral veins conspicuous, diverging
at an angle of 35-40° to the midrib; oil dots copious.
Ist pair of alternate leaves lanceolate, petiolate, 12 x
3.8 em.; venation and colour the same as the 4th pair.
2nd pair of alternate leaves lanceolate, petiolate, 13 x 4.3
em.; upper surface dark green, veins distinct, midrib,
lateral veins and margins a warm reddish-brown; lower
NEW SPECIES OF EUCALYPTUS AND ACACIA. 209
surface light green; veins prominent, green, diverging at
an angle of 30-40° to the midrib; intramarginal vein 3-4
mm. from the margin.
Internodes terete, except at their junction with the
leaves, purple-brown, ranging from 3-5 em. long.
At 4 inches high E. Joyceae is almost identical with
E. anomala, but after that, the leaves of the last-men-
tioned species become more sharply lanceolate and sessile,
and they also continue in the opposite stage for a greater
number of pairs than H. Joyceae, which does not appear
to exceed four or five pairs at most.
The seedlings of HE. Joyceae have fewer opposite leaves
than those of E. piperita; they are, however, larger, and
broader, also less glaucous and more lanceolate than those
of the latter species.
EUCALYPTUS ANOMALA n.sp.
Arbor 25-35 pedes alta; cortex pallide cinereus, rude diffissus
et fibrosus, persistens inferiore trunco, at supra laevis candi-
dusque; folia juvenilia opposita saltem decem paribus, late
lanceolata, sessilia vel amplexicaulia; folia adultiora, petiolata,
lanceolata vel obliquo-lanceolata, acuminata, crassa, coriacea,
5-19 x 2-3 cm.; venatio aliquantulum inconspicua, venae laterales
tennissimae, divergentes angulo 35-40° a costa media; umbellae
axillares vel pseudo-paniculatae; gemmae 10-20 in umbella,
pedicellatae, clavatae, fere omnino obtusae; tubus calycis sub-
calathiformis, 4-5 mm. diametro; operculum scutellariforme,
apiculatum; antherae omnes fertiles, parvae, reniformes;
capsulae subpyriformes, pedicellatae 7-8 v 6-8 mm.; lignum
pallidum, fissile.
Trees 25-30 feet high, 9-12 inches in diameter, with a
rough coarsely fibrous light-grey bark on the lower por-
tion of the trunk, the upper portion smooth and white,
which decorticates annually in long narrow ribbons.
Juvenile leaves opposite for six or more pairs, cordate-
lanceolate to lanceolate, sessile to somewhat amplexical,
eto x 3-7 em;
N—October 3, 1928.
210 W. F. BLAKELY.
Adult leaves alternate, petiolate, lanceolate to obliquely-
lanceolate, acuminate, thick, coriaceous, 5-19 x 2-3 em.
Venation somewhat obscure; lateral veins very fine, di-
verging at an angle of 35-40° to the midrib; intramarginal
vein usually distant from the margin.
Inflorescence 1n axillary umbels or forming moderately
large pseudo-panicles owing to the suppression of the
upper leaves, as is often seen in EF. haemastoma and E.
umbra. Peduneles compressed, dilated and thickened at
the top, 10-20 mm. long. Buds 10-20 in the umbel, pedi-
cellate, clavate, almost obtuse; pedicels slightly angular,
up to 7 mm. long. Calyx somewhat goblet-shaped, about
3 mm. deep, 4-5 mm. broad. Operculum shorter than the
ealyx-tube, apiculate, scutelliform, with a minute internal
appendage suspended from the top. Filaments numerous,
white, except at the extreme base, which are a pale purple,
all antheriferous. Anthers small, reniform, the broad
papery cells usually tipped with a minute globular gland.
Fruit pedicellate, shortly pyriform, 7-8 x 6-8 mm.,
truncate or more or less slightly domed; dise reddish,
moderately broad, forming a shghtly thickened ring
around the base of the valves, and extending almost over
the tips in a very thin layer; valves usually four, en-
closed; pedicels conspicuous, slightly compressed and
wrinkled, 5-9 mm. long.
Timber pale, close-grained, fairly hight, slightly darker
than that of H. umbra when fresh but apparently of the
same texture.
It is an interesting species from a taxonomic standpoint,
as it appears to form a natural connecting link between
the Stringybarks, and the Gums belonging to the Renan-
therae section.
NEW SPECIES OF EUCALYPTUS AND ACACIA. 211
The field and botanical characters of H. anomala so
elosely resemble those of H. Joyceae that Mr. Shiress and
myself for some time failed to distinguish the difference
between them, except that the venation of the leaves of
E. anomala was somewhat finer, and the leaves possessed
a slightly different perfume to those of E. Joyceae. Seeds
of both species were sown to ascertain whether there wou'd
be any marked difference between the young plants. When
the seedlings had reached a height of five inches, the
leaves of those of E. anomala were found to be totally
different from those of EF. Joyceae, both as regards size
and shape, and in being opposite for a greater number of
pairs. They also showed a marked affinity with those of
FE. umbra and E. acmenioides, two members of the Stringy-
bark series, while the seedlings of FE. Joyceae displayed
a striking resemblance to EL. pipertta on the one hand,
and HE. haemastoma on the other, and may be described
as being intermediate in character between the two species.
Renge.
So far it is known from Bywater, near Brooklyn,
Hawkesbury River, where it grows in association with
EL. umbra, E. haemastoma and E. punctata; on the southern
side of Sugarloaf, about five miles north of Brooklyn; also
about one mile due east of Cowan Railway Station, New
South Wales (D.W.C. Shiress and W.F.B.).
Affinities.
A close examination of the botanical characters and its
appearance in the field seem to suggest that it is a natural
hybrid between FE. haemastoma and E. umbra, and it may
be described as a rough-barked haemastoma, or a partly
smooth-barked wmbra.
The persistent rough-bark is very different both in
general appearance and in texture from that of EZ. wnbra.
While the smooth bark, although deciduous at one period
212 W. F. BLAKELY.
of the year, is unlike the bark of EF. haemastoma in that
it exuviates in long, narrow ribbons, and not in short,
broad pieces like the last named species. The venation of
the leaves is intermediate between that of H. haemastoma
and E. umbra; while the buds and the fruits resemble
those of the former species. The juvenile leaves, how-.
ever, are of the HE. wmbra type, and, therefore, sharply
separate it from EL. haemastoma, placing it without doubt
in the Stringybark series, notwithstanding the difference:
in the texture of the bark, and other morphological.
distinctions.
Description of Seedlings.
Hypocotyl slender, terete, purple-brown.
Cotyledons oblong-reniform, almost uniform without any
depression in the centre as 1s the case with many cotyledons.
belonging to the Reniformae Section, 8 x 5 mm., trinerved,
dark green above, purple-brown beneath.
1st pair of leaves opposite, petiolate, narrow-lanceolate:
to acute, 2.5 x 1 em., dark green and obscurely veined
above, purple-brown beneath. 2nd to 6th pair of leaves.
opposite, lanceolate to cordate-lanceolate, sessile to amplex-
ical, 9-14 x 3-6 em., dark green above, pale green beneath;
veins moderately fine, the intramarginal vein slightly
remote from the edge. Internodes elongated, terete, except
the broadly dilated portion close to the leaves, reddish
to a deep purple-brown.
In all stages up to 4 inches they are almost inseparable
from those of EH. Joyceae; after that they resemble the
seedlings of HE. wmbra and E. acmeniordes.
EucALypTus WaARDII, n.sp.
Arbor erecta, Stringybark, 60-70 pedes alta, 1-2 pedes dia-
metro; cortex crassus, fibrosus, ad parvos ramos persistens;
folia juvenilia 2-3 paribus opposita, angusto-lanceolata, breviter
petiolata, 3-12 x 1-2 cm., pallide viridia, glabra, nitentia; folia.
NEW SPECIES OF EUCALYPTUS AND ACACIA. 213
- adultiora alternata, petiolata, lanceolata vel falcato-lanceolata,
acuminata, 8-20 x 2-4 cm., obscuro-viridia; venae laterales a
costa mediana angulo 45° diver gentes; inflorescentia umbellis
exillaribus 7-14 mediocrium alborum florum; gemmae pedicel-
latae, fasciculis stellatim radiantibus, pedunculo subtereti 10-14
mm. longo; calyx cyathiformis, 4 x 3 mm.; operculum plerumque
rostratum, 4-5 mm. longum; anterae reniformes; capsulae ovales
vel pyriformes, pedicellatae, 8 x 8 — 9 x 10 mm. solidae, parvum
aditum praebentes; discus bene finitus, ex parte supra valvas
capsulae profunde inclusas extendens.
An erect Stringybark, 60-70 feet high, 1-2 feet in
diameter; bark thick, furrowed, fibrous, persistent to the
small branches, branchlets sub-terete.
Juvenile leaves (not seen from the base of the tree but
from the fruiting branches only) opposite for the first
two pairs, narrow-lanceolate, faleate-lanceolate to acumi-
nate, shortly petiolate, 3-12 x 1-2 em., light green, smooth
and shining without the slightest trace of stellate hairs.
Intermediate leaves (not seen from young saplings, but
from branch suckers only) alternate, narrow lanceolate or
obtuse-lanceolate, shortly petiolate, shghtly oblique, 9-10
x 3-4.5 em., ight green with a somewhat obscure venation.
Adult leaves alternate, petiolate, lanceolate to falcate-
lanceolate, acuminate, slightly oblique, 8-20 x 2-4 em., dark
green and glossy on both surfaces, moderately thick.
Venation somewhat obscure, the very fine lateral veins
diverging at an angle of 40-50° to the midrib; intra-
marginal nerve distant from the margin. Oil dots small,
Copious.
Inflorescence in axillary umbels of 7-14 white flowers.
Buds pedicellate, subfusiform, hight green, radiating in
stellate-like clusters on sub-terete peduncles 10-14 mm.
long. Calyx wine-glass shaped, 4 x 3 mm. Operculum
acuminate to rostrate 4-5 mm. long. Filaments white,
flexuose, nearly all fertile; anthers reniform, usually
erowned with a large globular gland.
214 W. F. BLAKELY.
Fruit oval to pyriform, distinctly pedicellate, 8 x 8 -—
9 x 10 mm. thick, contracted at the top into a small orifice ;
dise forming a well-defined ring inside the calycine border,
and which extends partly over the small, somewhat deeply
enclosed valves of the capsule. Timber pale, very fissile.
Range.
Confined to the Port Jackson district so far as we know
at present.
Gladesville (J. L. Boorman); Lane Cove River near
Killara (J. H. Maiden, Dec. 1898). The late Mr. Maiden
suggested that it might be a natural hybrid between EL.
pilularis and E. eugenioides. Near the old Wooi-wash,.
Spring Gully Creek, Hornsby (Ray Fogarty, E. Stanton
and W.F.B., June 1928). The type. On the Galston Road
14 miles from Hornsby (D. W. C. Shiress and W.F.B.,
July 1916). One mile 8.W. of Parramatta (R. H. Cambage,.
Mareh, 1901, 5:).
Named in honour of my esteemed friend and colleague,
Mr. E. N. Ward, Curator, Botanic Gardens, Sydney.
Affinities.
1. With E.entgra R. T. Baker. Both species are some-
what alike in carpological characters, but the fruits of
E. mgra are much thinner than those of HE. Wardu; the
buds of the former are also smaller and less rostrate, while
the juvenile leaves are narrower; and there is a marked
difference in the perfume of both species.
2. With E. eugeniordes Sieber. It is readily distinguished
from this species by the large subpyriform fruits, and
in the more rostrate buds. |
3. With L. Muelleriana Howitt. The fruits of HE. Wardit
resemble those of its ally both as regards shape and
sculpture, but on the whole they are smaller, while the
buds are totally different, being rostrate and not clavate
like the buds of HE. Muelleriana.
NEW SPECIES OF EUCALYPTUS AND ACACIA. 215
UNINERVES (RACEMOSAE).
Acacta LUCASII, n.sp.
Frutex humilis ramis cinero-tomentosis, germinibus juvenili-
bus dense cinereo-ferrugineis; phyllodia uninervia, ovata vel
elliptico-lanceolata, undulata, breviter petiolata, subrigida,
hirsuta, scabra, marginibus nervum flavescentem simulantibus,
2.5-38 cm. longa, 9-18 mm. lata; inflorescentia praebens capita
pedunculata vel racemos supra phyllodia prominentes; capita
dense villosa 12-20 flores comprehendunt; calyx parvus, sinuose
lobatus, hirsutus, duplo brevior corollae attenuatae; petala 5
ex parte conjuncta, angusto-lanceolata, hirsuta, solida, incurva;
legumina breviter stipitata, dense ferrugineo-tomentosa, ob-
longa, obtusa, 2-4 cm. longa, 1 cm. lata; semina breviter ob-
ligua; funiculus filiformis, in arillum candidum navicularem
desineris.
A small shrub, branches hoary-tomentose, the young
shoots and pods densely hoary-ferrugineous, phyllodia
uninerved, ovate to elliptical-lanceolate, undulate, shortly
petiolate, somewhat rigid and more or less hirsute and
scabrous, the yellowish nerve-like margins conspicuous, and
furnished with a small basal gland, 2.5-8 em. long, 9-18
mm. broad. Stipules small, black-pointed, semi-rigid,
moderately persistent and partly hirsute.
Inflorescence in pedunculate heads or more frequently
in flexuose, pubescent racemes exceeding the phyllodia.
(Perfect flower-heads not seen.) Heads globular, densely
villose, of 12-20 moderately large flowers.
Calyx small, sinuately lobed, hirsute, scarcely half the
length of the attenuated corolla. Petals 5, united near the
centre, hirsute, narrow-lanceolate, thick, incurved. Ovary
densely tomentose. Bracts spathulate to diamond-shaped,
concave at the back, with glandular, hirsute hairs con-
cealing the calyx.
Pods shortly stipitate, densely ferrugineous-villose,
oblong, obtuse, with thickened nerve-like margins, 2-4 em.
x 1 em. or larger. Seeds slightly oblique, jet black, ovate.
216 W. F. BLAKELY.
Funicle filiform for about half its length, finally terminat-
ing in a white, navicular arillus nearly the length of the
seed.
Named in honour of my friend and colleague, Mr.
A. H. 8S. Lucas.
Range.
Bumbury Creek and Green Hill, 8 miles towards
Wadbiliga, Tuross River district, New South Wales
(Miss M. A. Harnett, 16th January, 1928).
Near A. podalyriaefolia in the phyllodia, but totally
distinct from it in the 5-merous flowers, densely ferru- -
gineous-tomentose or villose young shoots and pods. The
pods are remarkable for their rich vestiture, which is a
striking contrast against the light green phyllodia with
their yellowish margins, and thereby A. Lucasw is readily
distinguished from all the Eastern species.
Acacia KYBEANENSIS Maiden and Blakely ;
this Journal 1927, 60, 188.
Pods not previously deseribed.
Pods oblong, moderately straight, distinctly stipitate,
apiculate, glabrous, slightly glaucous, the valves thin,
scarcely coriaceous, 3.5-5.5 em. long, 1.5 em. broad. Seeds
oblique or nearly so, ovate, jet black; funicle white,
filiform for about half its length, then thickened into a
carnose navicular aril nearly the length of the seed.
The broad pods connect it with A. podalyriaefolia.
Tuross River (Miss M. A. Harnett, December, 1927).
I wish to express my thanks to Dr. G. P. Darnell-Smith,
Director, Botanic Gardens, Sydney, for his advice and
interest in this paper.
Journal Royal Society of N.S.W., Vol. LX1/., 1928. Plate XVIT,
Re
“
:
4
:
‘
3
frm nen
E’. Joycee Blakely,
Journal Royal Society of N.S.W., Vol. LXII., 1928 Plate XVIII.
j
i
j
4
j
i
;
:
|
|
EF. anomala Blakely,
Journal Royal Society of N.S.W., Vol. LX11., 1928. Plate XIX.
H. Wardii Blakely,
os
Journal Royal Society of N.S.W., Vol. LXII., 1928 Plate XX.
HE
j
F
:
i
j
;
a
}
j
4
:
:
es:
Acacia Lucasii Blakely,
NEW SPECIES OF EUCALYPTUS AND ACACIA. 217
EXPLANATION OF PLATES.
Pian XevVE,
Eucalyptus Joyceae Blakely.
1. A large juvenile leaf.
bo
. Buds and fruits, all from one mile 8. of Kariong Trig.
The type.
3. Fruiting branch, 8 miles from Gosford on the top of
Penang Ranges (Andrew Murphy). Co-type.
Puate XVIII.
Eucalyptus anomala Blakely.
1. Young buds; la, fully developed buds and flowers.
2. Fruiting branch.
3. Juvenile leaf. All from Bywater.
lean uwoyp.S B:G
Eucalyptus Wardu Blakely.
1. Portion of a fruiting branch producing a sucker with
| two pairs of opposite leaves.
2. Buds.
d. Fruits. All from the same tree, Spring Gully Creek,
Hornsby. |
PATH eX Xe
Acacia Lucasu Blakely.
Portion of a branch showing phyllodia and pods.
218 A. R. PENFOLD AND F. R. MORRISON.
“THE CHEMISTRY OF THE EXUDATION FROM
THE WOOD OF PENTASPODON MOTLEYI.”
By A. R. PENFOLD, F.A.C.L, F.C.S.
Curator and Economic Chemist,
and
F’. R. Morrison, A.A.C.1., F.C.S.
Assistant Economic Chemist, Technological Museum, Sydney.
(Read before the Royal Society of New South Wales, 5th Dec., 1928.)
Mr. C. E. Lane-Poole, Inspector-General of Forests, Aus-
tralian Forestry School, Canberra, in a communication
dated 28th November, 1927, enquired if the Sydney
Technological Museum would undertake the examination,
with special reference to its economic utilisation, of a cer-
tain oil which exudes from a tree occurring in New Guinea,
and identified as close to Pentaspodon Motleyi. In com-
plianee with this request, the examination was readily
undertaken, and a quantity of the oil, which previously was
obtainable in very limited quantity and difficult to procure,
was made available. As a matter of fact, Mr. Lane-Poole
reports that the quantity supplied, about 2 pints, took him
four years to obtain.
The botanical description and general characters of the
tree yielding this remarkable exudation are given in Mr.
Lane-Poole’s Report, ‘‘The Forest Resources of the Terri-
tories of Papua and New Guinea,’’ 1925, page 109. (This:
publication is printed and published for sale by the Com-
monwealth Government of Australia).
The following interesting and necessary particulars
which furnish an account of the physical characters and
source of the exudation are extracted therefrom, viz. :—
CHEMISTRY OF PENTASPODON MOTLEYI. 219
“The wood of this large tree, 8 feet girth, bole 80 feet, 120
feet over all, contains an oil in such abundance that it may
be collected in conveniently placed receptacles, much as resin
is collected from the Maritime Pine, only the cut must reach
the heart. In many cases the flow is very heavy, and in one
instance a gallon of oil was collected in three hours. In such
cases it is probable that reservoirs of oil have been formed
in hollows caused by rot, and the axe has tapped a crack that
has piped off the supply. While a microscope may yield
some explanation of the formation of the oil in the wood, a
lens shows no special canals or vessels as one would expect
to see. The oil is heavy and misty brown in colour; it re-
sembles motor lubrication oil as used for cylinders. It has a
smell which is hard to describe, though somewhat familiar—-
somewhat fishy linseed oil is the nearest I can get to it.”
We can confirm the physical characters so aptly described
by Mr. Lane-Poole. To all intents and purposes, the oil, on
account of its dark brown colour, viscosity, odour, etc.,
might easily be mistaken for a commercial boiled linseed oil.
Referring again to the origin of the exudation, Mr. Lane-
Poole, in a private communication, states :—
“Microscopic examination shows that the medullary rays
have canals, and these, even from dried specimens of the:
wood, still store their quantity of oil. This is clearly visible
with the liberkuhn method of illumination. I am sending yow
a sample of the wood, so that you may examine it, also you.
will see that the oil exudations are visible to the naked eye.”
Mr. M. B. Welch, B.Sc., A.I.C., Economie Botanist at the-
Sydney Technological Museum, who examined the small
sample of wood referred to above, furnished the following:
report thereon, viz. :—
“The wood has been examined microscopically, and Sudan
III. and alkannin both show the presence of oily bodies in
the cavities of the sparsely distributed medullary secretary
passages, in the cells of the thick walled protective sheath
surrounding the canal, and to a slight extent in some of the
wood parenchyma adjoining the canal, but nowhere else. The
canals observed varied from 18-55 yy in diameter. The con--
contents were practically all soluble in 95% alcohol.”
The very small original sample of exudation secured by
Mr. Lane-Poole was submitted to Mr. T. G. H. Jones,
University of Queensland, Brisbane, and his report is pub-.
220 A. R. PENFOLD AND F. R. MORRISON.
ished in the ‘‘ Forest Resources of Papua and New Guinea,”’
1925, pages 168-169. Unfortunately, the quantity avail-
able did not enable this chemist to make more than a pre-
liminary examination, and beyond the statement that it
consisted of unsaturated acids possessing a molecular
weight of about 400, no other data has been published.
The present investigation of the larger samples submitted
has shown the exudation to consist approximately of about
‘90-95°% of acid bodies possessing unusual characters. The
‘erude oil is non-volatile in steam, and we were unable to
effect its distillation under reduced pressure (1 mm.) with-
out decomposition. Consequently, it is very difficult to pro-
duce evidence as to whether the principal component is a
‘chemical entity or a mixture. For the purpose of this °
-announcement it is regarded as a single acid. Evidence is
adduced under ‘‘ Experimental’’ which shows the principal
acid to be mono-carboxylic with two hydroxyl groups, and
to possess the molecular formula C,,H,,0,. It gives a
beautiful violet colouration with ferric chloride in alcoholic
‘solution. Unfortunately, no crystalline or solid derivatives
(except the silver salt) could be prepared.
The original objective of the investigation was to ascet-
tain if the oil possessed any economic value. Consisting
essentially of an acid or acids of high molecular weight, it
yielded soaps with alkalies, which technically possessed
‘special merits on account of their valuable emulsifying pro-
perties. At present, no other commercial use can be sug-
gested. Its economic utilisation depends entirely on the
possibility of supplhes being obtained in commercial quan-
‘tities. At present the prospects of its availability in large
quantities at a cost which would enable it to compete with
rosin or similar products is not promising, judging from
Mr. Lane-Poole’s report. However, very little is known of
the extent of the natural products of New Guinea in its pre-
-sent undeveloped condition. |
CHEMISTRY OF PENTASPODON MOTLEYI. 221
Experimental.
The two samples of oily exudation received gave the fol-
lowing chemical and physical constants on examination::
Sample No. 1. Sample No. 2.
Specific Gravity, res 1.011 1.01
Refractive Index, 20°C .. 1.5280 1.5295
mei Number ..,... ... 139.08 138.24
Saponification Number .. 142.09 146.64
Solubility in 70°% Alcohol
@oyaawmeieht) 2. ..' .. 2.6 vols. 2.5 vols.
Acid Number after acety-
leeomye ae Pe s LO207 102.53
Iodine Number (Wijs) ... —— 192
Chloride in ethyl aleohol jprecipitate forming on
Reaction with Ferric (Deep violet colour with
solution .. standing.
It was found early in the investigation that the crude
oil was soluble in 8% aqueous sodium hydroxide solution,
and, therefore, in order to determine if the constituents
were of a variable nature it was treated with 1% aqueous.
solution ammonium carbonate, 5°94 aqueous sodium ear-
bonate, and 8% aqueous sodium hydroxide solutions respec-
tively. The best procedure was to dissolve the erude oil
in approximately four times its volume of ether, and to
treat repeatedly with the reagents mentioned.
Ammonium Carbonate Extract—On acidification with
dilute sulphuric acid, extraction with ether and removal of
solvent, only 0.8% of a dark brown viscous residue was
obtained. It gave a faint violet colouration with ferric
chloride in alcoholic solution much resembling the crude
oil and main component, and was found to possess an acid
number of 114.2.
Sodium Carbonate Extract —Shaking at room tempera-
ture with this reagent failed to remove more than a trace
of acid bodies.
222 A. R. PENFOLD AND F. R. MORRISON.
Sodium Hydroxide EHxtract—On treatment with this
reagent the greater part of the oil went into solution. On
acidification with dilute sulphuric acid, extraction with
ether, and removal of solvent, 93°94 of a dark reddish brown
viscous oil, much resembling the crude exudation, was
recovered. |
Neutral Residue.—The main ethereal solution on removal
of solvent yielded 5% of a yellow viscous oil with an acid
number of 11 and refractive index of 1.5330. It did not
give a colour reaction with ferric chloride in alcoholic
solution.
Examination of Principal Acid Constituent.
Soluble in 8% sodium hydroxide solution.
This component, which constituted over 90% of the crude
‘exudation, was found to possess the following chemical and
physical characters, viz. :—
Specific Gravity, LO aaa: Veet 1.0132
Refractive Index. 20" 4G) i" hss 1.5270
Solubility in 70% alcohol (by weight) 3.3 vols.
Acid Number). 0) a Se
Do. after acetylation |... > .ovWdi@een
Saponitication No. 2.2. 08) Fe Te
Do. after acetylation .. .. 203.24
Iodine Number (Wijs) 30° .. 32° 28
Molecular weight for monobasic acid
ealeulated from Acid Number .. .. 3885.
Colour Reaction.—A very striking violet colour reaction
‘was obtained when a drop of ferric chloride solution was
added to a dilute alcoholic solution of this acid. A similar
‘eoloured precipitate separated on standing.
Molecular Formula.—the following results were obtained
on combustion, viz. :—
(1) 0.1068 gram gave 0.2902 gram CO, & 0.0919 gram H,O
C= 7417... B= oo2
CHEMISTRY OF PENTASPODON MOTLEYI. 233
(2) 0.1040 gram gave 0.2824 gram CO, & 0.0884 gram H,O
C0 Ee a
(3) 0.1154 gram gave 0.51386 gram CO, & 0.0970 gram H,O
C= (267. = oa.
C,,H,,0, requires C = 74.28%. H = 9.23%.
Molecular Weight Deternination—A molecular weight
determination by the Landsberger boiling point method,
using acetone as solvent, gave the following result, viz. :—
1.5416 grams in 21 ¢.c. acetone elevated the boiling point 0.42°
(average of 8 readings). M.Wt. = 384
C,,H,,0, required M.Wt. = 388
Silver Salt—The silver salt was prepared by neutralisa-
tion of the acid body with dilute ammonia solution and pre-
cipitation with silver nitrate solution. 0.7658 gram silver
salt gave on ignition 0.1650 gram silver = 21.55% silver.
The silver salt of C,,H,,0, requires 21.82°% silver.
Copper Salt——On trituration of the acid with excess of
copper carbonate no action appeared to take place at room
temperature, but upon heating at water bath temperature
a vigorous reaction resulted. The green copper salt was
extracted by means of acetone, and was found upon removal
of the solvent to be a very viscous and sticky green paste
which would not solidify.
0.5722 gram of copper salt gave 0.0544 gram CuO on
inition — 9 517 Cud.
The copper salt of a monobasic acid of molecular formula,
C,,H,,0, would yield by calculation 9.44% CuO.
Presence of ‘‘CO”’ and “‘OH”’ Groups.
The presence of ‘‘carbonyl’’ groups could not be detected
by the use of hydroxylamine or semi-carbazone salts. The
solubility, colour reaction, and general chemical deport-
ment, so far observed, point to the presence of one
224 A. R. PENFOLD AND F. R. MORRISON.
‘“carboxyl’’ group and two ‘‘hydroxyl’’ groups in the mole-
cule of this acid. The presence of the latter was demon-
strated by the reactions with phenylisocyanate and particu-
larly with napthylisocyanate, but no definite crystalline
derivatives could be isolated from the reaction mixtures.
Action of Bromine.—Treatment with bromine at —20°
in both dry ether and carbon disulphide solutions respec-
tively yielded sticky masses which could not be induced to
erystallise.
jiu
THE ESSENTIAL OIL OF A NEW BORONIA. 225
THE ESSENTIAL OIL FROM A BORONIA IN THE
PINNATA SECTION.
FROM FRAZER ISLAND, QUEENSLAND.
(Together with a resumé of the essential oils from other closely
allied pinnate leaf Boronias.)
By A. RK, PENPOLD, H/ACCN., FIC.S:
Curator and Economic Chemist, Technological Museum, Sydney.
(Read before the Royal Society of New South Wales, 5th Dec., 1928.)
Shortly after the publication of a joint paper with Mr.
M. B. Welch, B.Sc., A.I.C., Economie Botanist, Techno-
logical Museum, Sydney, on the Botany and Chemistry of
Boronia pinnata (Smith) and Boronia thujona (sp. nov.)
(This Journal, Vol. LV. (1921), pages 196-209), material
from a pinnate leaf Boronia from Frazer Island, Queens-
land, was kindly furnished by Mr. C. T. White, F.L.S.,
Government Botanist of that State. It has been known up
to the present as the ‘‘Thin-leafed’’ Boronia pinnata from
Frazer Island.
The examination of the essential oil from but a pound
weight of the leaves and terminal branchlets revealed a
striking difference between it and the oils from closely allied
Species. Supplies of the leaves and terminal branchlets in
quantity were accordingly procured through the good
offices of the Queensland Forest Service for the express
purpose of examining the essential oil. The leaves, on
crushing between the fingers, emitted the powerful and
eharacteristic odour of safrol. Mr. C. T. White, F.L:S.,
Government Botanist of Queensland, and Mr. E. Cheel,
Curator of the National Herbarium, Sydney, have given
much attention to the study of this thin-leafed form of
O—December 5, 1928.
226 A. R. PENFOLD.
Boronia pinnata, and both are of the opinion that it is pro-
bably a form of either Boronia thujona (Penfold and
Welch) or of Borona Muellert (Cheel). It is necessary
at this stage briefly to review the scattered data on the
characters and chemistry of these closely allied species of
Boronia in order that the points of difference between those
already described and this new form may be clearly
demonstrated.
In the first instance, a paper entitled ‘‘On the Essential
Oil of Boroma prnnata, Sm., and the presence of Hlemicin,’’
by H. G. Smith, F.C.S., was published in the ‘‘ Proceedings
of the Royal Society of Victoria,’’ Vol. XXXII. (new
series), part 1, 1919, pages 14-19. The species of Boronia
referred to therein as B. pinnata, Sm., was later shown by
Mr. E. Cheel to be identical with B. pinnata var. Muelleri,
Bentham. This worker considered it to be worthy of
specific rank and accordingly named it Boronia Muelleri,
sp. nov. (See this Journal, Vol. LVIII. (1924), page 147).
Leaves and terminal branchlets were kindly furnished in
1925 by Miss C. C. Currie, of Lardner, Victoria, through
the Forestry Commission of Victoria, and the results
obtained in the examination of the essential oil confirmed
those obtained by the late H. G. Smith in the paper referred
to above. (See under ‘‘ Experimental.’’)
Although Mr. HE. Cheel finds difficulty in separating this
species, B. Muelleri, from B. thujona by any well-defined
botanical characters (see paper, ‘‘Notes on Boronia in the
pinnate section, with a description of a new species,’’ by
E. Cheel, this Journal, Vol. LVIII. (1924), page 148), the
writer, who has handled the material in bulk for oil distilla-
tion, has been able to discern a marked difference in general
appearance, both in disposition of foliage and flowers. As
a matter of fact, it is the most abundant flowering pinnate
leaf Boronia I have as yet observed, the long terminals
being especially heavily laden with blossom.
THE ESSENTIAL OIL OF A NEW BORONIA. 227
Referring now to the thin-leafed Boronia from Frazer
Island, the Queensland Forest Service, in a letter under
date 25th August, 1927, furnished the following particulars
regarding its habitat which were supplied by the officer
responsible for the collection of the material forwarded for
oil distillation purposes.
“On Fraser Island Boronia pinnata occurs in moist gullies
and on the edges of fresh water swamps and creeks, where
plenty of moisture is obtainable, but where the sun has play
upon its foliage. The soil is composed of sand and rotting
humus. It there grows in association with Leptospermum
Liversidgei, Banksia latifolia and grasses and shrubs found
in this type of country. The associated trees are Broadleafed
Tea tree (Melaleuca leucadendron) and Swamp Mahogany
(Eucalyptus robusta). The Boronia varies in height from
two to six feet with a maximum stem diameter of one inch
at ground level.”
The habitat of Boronia thujona is very similar, but it
has been observed to attain a greater height, sometimes up
to 12 feet from the ground, with a stem diameter of 2ins. at
ground level. The writer suggests that the Frazer Island
Boronia be considered as a form of: B. thujona until such
time as botanical science is able to bring forward morpho-
logical or other evidence that will differentiate it from the
closely allied species or forms.
Although the essential oil is particularly high in content
of safrol it is a species quite distinct from Boronia
safrolifera, which is easily determinable by botanists (see
this Journal, Vol. LVIII, 1924, page 146 and pages 230-
‘233, papers by Cheel and Penfold, respectively).
The essential oils of the various species in the pinnate
section show a remarkable diversity in chemical composi-
tion, particulars of which are given in the summary at the
end of this paper.
1228 A. R. PENFOLD.
The Essential Oils.
Pinnate Leaf Boroma from Frazer Island, Q.
(B. thujona, var. ‘*A.’’)
Two hundred and twenty-two and a half pounds weight
of leaves and terminal branchlets were kindly furnished
through the courtesy of the Queensland Forest Service.
On distillation with steam, yellow oils, heavier than water,
highly refracting and fluorescent, and smelling strongly of
safrol, were obtained in a yield of 0.5 to 0.6% (second con-
signment ignored on account of loss of oil during drying
and transit). The chemical and physical characters are
shown in table I.
The principal constituents, so far identified, were found
to be safrol (75-80% ) and [-limonene, with small quantities
of phenolic bodies, sesquiterpene, and a paraffin of M.Pt.
65-66°.
Experimental.
The two principal distillates gave the following results
on distillation, viz. :—
17/9/1923. 80 ¢.c., after removal of 0.61 gram phenolic
constituents, commenced to distil at 70°
(20 mm.), 20% distilled below 107° (10
mm.), and 75° distilled between 108°-112°
(10 mm.).
24/7/1925. 100 ec. crude oil after removal of 0.1 gram
phenolic constituent yielded 11% between
70° (20 mm.) and 107° (0 "mmo yes.
between 70°-106° (10 mm.), 80% between
106°=11.2> 9110 mame),
Determination of Linonene.—The lower boiling fractions
of the above distillates were subjected to repeated fractional
distillation over metallic sodium with the following
results :—
229
THE ESSENTIAL OIL OF A NEW BORONIA.
"29° =: YYS1IOM SI UO [IO
Jo prark £ paqoayqoo ueyM ‘sq1Og Poyste M
‘Louphg 04 yoyedsap a0jz Buryoud 04
Jold epeys Ul petip are Ay[nJorwo soavory | T'2z | £°9 "S[OA 6
‘praré Moy AyTTemI0uQe soueY “QIsuRI4
ur pus sutsap Sutanp Aqeqoad ysoy TIO
‘pesodmooep Ay[ey4aed pue Aap Lava soavey | 9°82 | F°6 *STOA 9
(uyereg
Joey)
-siedes
qyta
eae 8-OT | ‘S]oA $¢
; ‘des you |(*94810m Aq )
*SyIVUIOI qiaqye es Dea
gaqsq | 798M | A9itanios
‘puvjsuoonty ‘puvys] aozwrq woay .V., ‘AVA ‘VNOCOHL VINOYOI—I ATAVA
09ZE"1 | o9°8— | E9C0°T
PSTIG'T | oTT- 68T0°T
GSZS°T | o@° IT - | S9CGO'T
da a
ed 002” of tP
%69'0
%10°O
%ES'0
"SqIOL | SZ61/L/FZ
‘sqteze | ¢z61/T/cI
‘SqIoL | e26t/6/L1
‘1lO
JO Petz
*sOAvO'T
yo a6
FU SIOM
230 A. R. PENFOLD.
(17/9/23 Lot. Boiling Point, 66° - 72° (10mm) ; d42°, 0.852 =
ae = esto 5 ne LAS
24/7/25 Lot, Boiling Point, 174° - 177°(767mm); d}3", 0.85125.
Ga, — Aor) er al Aa a
aM
Both fractions, after being saturated with water, and dis-
solved in four times their volume of glacial acetic acid,
were treated with bromine at —20°. On standing overnight
in the ice chest, characteristic crystals of limonene tetra-
bromide separated, which, on isolation, drying and
recrystallisation from ethyl acetate, melted sharply at 104°.
Determination of Safrol.—The fractions distilling
between 106°-112° were placed in a bath of solid carbon
dioxide, and the frozen mass transferred to a Buchner filter
funnel surrounded with a mixture of ice and salt. The
crude safrol thus obtained was further purified by redistil-
lation. It gave the following constants on examination,
VIZ. :—
B.pt. 109°— 110° (10mm); Melting point +11°, d32°, 1.1045;:
20° kd 20°
aXe 4-0"; one, dubge2.
The filtrate from the solid safrol was found to be free
from methyl eugenol, and to consist mainly of safrol with a
little sesquiterpene.
The identity of this phenol ether was confirmed by boiling
- ona sand tray, for a prolonged period, 30 c.c. of the purified
safrol in 200 ¢.c. of ethyl alcohol containing 8 grams of
sodium in solution. The iso-safrol obtained gave the fol-
lowing results on examination, viz :—
B.pt. 1203° — 122° (10mm); d24°, 1.123; n°, 1.5740
On oxidation with chromic acid in glacial acetic acid.
solution solid heliotropine was obtained, which, on purifica-
tion through the bisulphite compound, melted sharply
at 37°.
THE ESSENTIAL OIL OF A NEW BORONIA. 231
Determination of Minor Constituents —The residues from
the distillation of the Safrol fractions were found to con-
tain small. quantities of sesquiterpenes, just detectable by
the well-known colour reactions with bromine in acetic acid
solution and sulphuric acid in acetic anhydride solution.
Phenolic Bodies—The first consignment examined
yielded 0.6 gram crude liquid phenol removed from 80 c.e.
oil by means of 8°4 sodium hydroxide solution. It pos-
sessed a refractive index of 1.51380 and gave a brillant
orange red colouration with ferric chloride in alcoholic
solution, and formed an ammonium salt melting at 132°-
133°. It bore a close resemblance to the remarkable con-
stituent isolated from the oil of Backhousia angustifolia by
means of 8°4 sodium hydroxide solution and tentatively
termed a ‘‘phenol’’ (see this Journal, Vol. LVII, 1923,
pages 300-312).
The last consignment, 24/7/’25, yielded only 0.1% crude
liquid phenol, giving an indifferent colour reaction with
ferric chloride in alcoholic solution, and apparently was in
no way related to that isolated from the first distillate.
Paraffin —The residues from the distillation of the frac-
tions rich in safrol were found to contain small quantities
of paraffin, which, on purification from alcohol, melted at
65-66°.
Boroma pinnata (Smith).
Previous attempts to determine the identity of the prin-
cipal terpene were unsuccessful (see this Journal, Vol. LV.
(1921), pages 199-200), but recently a small yield of
limonene tetrabromide of melting point 104° was obtained
from the terpene fraction. This offers confirmation of the
identity of the principal terpene with limonene, which body
was thought to be present, though no evidence in support
could be secured.
232 A. R. PENFOLD.
Boronia thujona (Penfold & Welch).
Further supplies of the leaves and terminal branchlets
from numerous localities have been examined since the
publication of this species (see this Journal, Vol. LY.
(1921), pages 200-208), and the results obtained have in ©
every instance confirmed those originally published. A
consignment of leaves from Pymble, N.S.W., gave the
highest yield obtained to date with fresh material, viz.,
0.8%. The author had the pleasure of examining the shrub
in the field, both at Woodburn and Wardell, Richmond
River district, New South Wales, in May, 1924, where the
plants were found to be in all respects similar to those
growing in the neighbourhood of Sydney. The late W.
Bauerlen collected a specimen of this Boronia at Wardell
as far back as the year 1893. It was of interest to observe
all three species, B. pinnata (Smith), B. safrolifera (Cheel)
and B. thujona, growing in close proximity to one another
at Broadwater, Richmond River, N.S.W.
Boroma Muelleri (Cheel).
Great difficulty was experienced in securing further sup-
plies of the leaves and terminal branchlets of this species,
but a small quantity was received on the 9th November,
1925, from Miss C. C. Currie, Lardner, Victoria, through
the good offices of the Victorian Forestry Commission. The
material received was in full bloom, being the most heavily
blossom laden pinnate leaf Boronia, especially at the ter-
minals, which I have handled to date. The flowers were
much paler in colour than those of B. thujona.
Experimental.
Sixteen lbs. weight of leaves and terminal branchlets on
steam distillation yielded 0.6% of highly refracting and
fluorescent oil, yellow in colour, and heavier than water. It
gave the following results on examination, viz. :—
dis°, 1.0265 ; ans +1.50° ; cee A. 5150.
Soluble in 0.8 vol. 80° alcohol, ste No. 20.5.
Ester No. after acetylation, 34.7.
233
THE ESSENTIAL OIL OF A NEW BORONIA.
CHILE TAuqoW x0 sousseid ey} 04 elauaord eup ‘jusosaaony A[su014s o10M Sotoeds anoj ie WIOIJ S[IO 9],
‘ozo ‘uTgesed ‘sorpoq o1jousqd
‘euodseyinbses ‘euououy, “(%og— Gz) oases
uyeaed pus
auedzeymnbses (%og—08) euolny,y, g pue v
aqeyoor [AURIS
puv joruvases ‘ouould-v-p “(%06— OL) UloIME |
ulered ‘ouedsoqyinbses ‘oueurd-v-p ‘oueuowr1y]
*‘squUON4Iysuog
0929'T oe Tl —
04 0}
GSZG'T o98 — 9S0'T %9'0 04 S°0
ShSP'l | obS'9G — ZS16.0
04 04 04
9ZSP'T oot ie 1ZI6o0 | %8'0 4 9°0
OSIS'T Sse te ¢9Z0'T
0} 03 04
'eZI19'T OG Leas LETO'T | %LS°0 04 8E°0
CZ8P'I | 83st — L168°0
04 04 04
ZOLP'I oLb- | P8280 | XT'0 04 Z0'0 |"
024 oe? otP | TO PIOLA
CO ‘puspsy
negate WOIJ) V5, TBA
is “-nuolny, DiwoL0g
~ (TA pue plojuez)
puoiny, DiUoLog
([20qD)
WAIN VwU0L0g
(q310I1g)
pyouurd viwo10g
-Soroedy JO oUIBNT
‘VINOYOd HO SHIONdS — WOUA STIO TVILNASSA AHL dO AUVNWOAS—'I Tava
Dot A. R. PENFOLD.
23 ¢.c. on distillation under reduced pressure gave the
following results, viz :—
Commenced to distil at 55° (8 mm.).
2 c.e. distilled below 130° (6 mm.).
20 c.c. distilled between 130°-149° (5 mm.) principally
at 140°-144° (5 mm.).
dis? ae 0°
D
The first fraction had 0.9236 + 7.6° LA ya2
andthe second G2. “Ra i05385 +0.6° 1.5212
Determination of Elemicin.—The presence of this phenol
ether in quantity (in the crude oil equal to about 90%)
was confirmed by oxidation of 16 ¢.c. with alkaline potas-
sium permanganate according to the procedure outlined in
the author’s paper on the ‘‘Essential oil of Backhousia
myrtifolia’’ published in this Journal, Vol. LVI. (1922),
page 128. The crystals of trimethylgallic acid, weighing
6 grams, were recrystallised from ethyl alcohol, when they
melted at 169-170°. Titration with semi-normal alkali
solution showed the acid to be monobasic, with a molecular
weight of 213. C,,H,,0; requires 212. The ether soluble
acid, weighing 2 grams, was recrystallised from ethyl
alcohol and melted at 119°-120°. It proved to be trime-
thylhomogallic acid, as titration with semi-normal alkali
solution showed it to have a molecular weight of 227.
C,,H,,0; requires 226.
The above results confirm those published by the late
H. G. Smith in the Proceedings of the Royal Society of
Victoria, Vol. XXXII. (1919). The quantity of Elemicin
in the later distillation, 90%, was much higher than that
referred to in the above publication, 70%. My thanks are
due to the Botanists and to the Forestry Departments men-
tioned in the paper for valuable advice and assistance in
the identification and procuring of the plant material
examined, and to Mr. F. R. Morrison, A.A.C.1., F.CS8.,
Assistant Economic Chemist, for much assistance in the
chemical examination of the essential oils.
DEFECTIVE OREGON. 235+
AN EXAMINATION OF DEFECTIVE OREGON
(PSEUDOTSUGA TAXIFOLIA).
M: B. WELCH: B:Sce., A.I.C.,
Economic Botanist, Technological Museum.
With Plates XXI-XXIII.
(Read before the Royal Society of New South Wales, 5th Dec., 1928.)
Oregon or Douglas Fir, Pseudotsuga taxifolia (Lam.)
Britton (P. Douglasti Carr), is usually regarded as a strong:
tough wood and is used extensively in building construc-
tion for scantlings, scaffoldings, ete. Recently an Oregon
back stay of an electric derrick crane, which was being used
in demolition work, broke suddenly and without warning,
whilst under load, resulting in a very serious accident.
The defective timber was submitted by the Seaffolding and
Lifts Branch of the Department of Labour and Industry
of New South Wales for examination. Since Oregon is:
used so largely for purposes in which it is subjected to:
heavy loads, it was thought advisable to examine the wood
fairly thoroughly in order to determine, if possible, the:
eause of failure. The wood appeared to be quite normal
and its external appearance gave no indication of its
brittleness.
The broken wood showed a typically brash failure which
was almost without splinters and unlike the ‘‘long-fibre:
break’’ usually obtained for Oregon. Brashness or brittle-
ness is a most serious defect in timber, since under load the
wood is liable to fail suddenly and the absence of warning
often results in serious consequences ; the wood is especially’
hable to rupture under sudden or impact loads.
236 M. B. WELCH.
The following mechanical tests were made :—
Static bending tests.
Static bending tests on 3” x 3” x 36” span, centre load.
‘The test pieces were cut to this size to include as much as
possible of the cross section of the beam, which measured
7.6” x 6.6.” Four test pieces were therefore obtained.
it EK D rpu.. LOW. ae
1 7000 1,700,000 32.4 6.3 24 14.9
2 9000 1,660,000 33.0 8.5 24 15.1
3 8600 1,730,000 33.1 8.0 20 14.6
4 8000 1,720,000 34.4 Ou 26 14.6
Mean 8150 1,703,000 33.2 8.0 25 14.8
f = Modulus of Rupture in lbs. per sq. in.
E = Modulus of Elasticity in lbs. per sq. in.
D Weight per cubic foot at time of testing; air
dry volume and weight.
|
Y.p.1. = Average number of growth rings per inch.
‘L.W. = Percentage of late or summer wood in the
erowth ring.
M = Moisture percentage on the dry weight.
‘The proportional limit was not clearly defined in tests.
‘The failures were carroty and the wood failed in tension
without warning.
Two static bending tests were made on the full-sized
‘timber with a span of six feet, centre loading.
f E rp. Lowe |
1 4890 1,570,000 Max.10 ) 14.5
26.2
2 7680, 570 COON Nin | 5a 15.0
Mean 6285 — 1,570,000 8.5 assay spel
The proportional limit was not defined. The failures
-~were sudden, partially in tension and horizontal shear, and
‘definitely indicated the brashness of the wood.
DEFECTIVE OREGON. 237
Additional static bending tests were made subsequently,
on 2” x 2” x 28” span*. It will be noted that the moisture
content has decreased.
W. W.to
f1 a E Vile Dey) eps ewe MM.
fa50 7930 1,870,000 1.58 2.08 32.0 80 243 138.0:
7980 8820 1,890,000 Sie, 2b Sw oes, » 90" | 28:4 F128
7350 7480 1,810,000 1:63 "1945 32-6 §8.0 28:0) 12.2
7140 «F715 ~=61,580,000 1.79 2.40 31.3. 65 24.8. 12.7
W450 7990. 1,790,000 1.72 2.25 -81.9 74 264 12.7
ee
ng = Fibre stress at proportional limit in lbs. per
square inch.
W.toP.L. = Work to proportional limit in inch lbs. per
cubic inch.
W. to M.L. = Work to maximum load in inch lbs. per cubie
inch.
For comparison the results of the following static bending
tests are given, made on small clear specimens from the
Technological Museum.
3” x 38” x 86” span centre load.
a E D. TDs L.W. M.
1 11,620 2,260,000 34.7 16.0 39.6 1224.
2 12,660 2,330,000 Bia 20.5 36.9 12.6:
3 18,580 1,670,000 Base 1270 34.5 11.3
4 13,060 2,010,000 BVA 145) 28.6 10.9
5 10,520 1,800,000 36.5 6.5 38.4 12.4
6 8,400 1,770,000 Bore 4.0 35.8 11.9:
7 7,660 1,330,000 26.4 4.0 25.2 12.0:
Mean 11,070 1,800,000 30.0 11.0 31.4 11.9
es —— eee ————e
The following static bending tests were made on 2” x 2”
x 28” span clear specimens.
* Tests marked * have been made in conformity with the
specification adopted for testing small clear specimens of timber
and described in U.S.D.A. Forest Service Bull. 108, and subse-
quently in Projects I. of the Canadian Forest Product Labora-
tory and also of the Department of Scientific and Industrial
Research, Forest Products Research, of Great Britain, 1928..
“238 M. B. WELCH.
f E D Pupil. M
Maximum .. 14,730 2,350,000 35.6 35 14.2
Dinimum., 3,800 1,290,000 24.8 17 9.8
Mean 12 tests 11,520 1,790,000 31.9 22. 1 vane
Canadian’ and American®) mean tests for static bending
tests on 2” x 2” x 28” span air dry clear specimens are as
follows :—
W.to W. to
fel f E P.L. M.L. D+ r.p.i. L.W. M.
Mountain (1) 8,460 18,340 1,664,000 2.44 8.40 31.4 26.2 25.0 9.5
Mountain (1) 9,540 13,620 1,806,000 2.86 11.80 338.2 17.4 32.0 10.7
‘Coast (1) 8,990 14,050 2,142,000 2.20 9.90 33.4 1333 38.0 11.1
Wyoming (2) 6,900 10,300 1,460,000 1.83 6.5 338.6 22.0 27.0 9.4
‘Oregon (2)10,600 14,000 2,210,000 2.94 8.4 38.1 13.0 35.0 6.2
U.S.A. (3) 5,065 6,777 1,858,000 —— 31.0 12.2 41.0 14.9
(1) Some Commercial Softwoods of Canada. Forest Service
Bulletin No. 78, Dept. of Interior, Canada, 1927.
(2) Mechanical Properties of Woods grown in U.S.A. Newlin
and Wilson, U.S. Dept. of Agric. Forest Service, Bull. 556,
1917.
‘(3) Mean figures for 5” x 8” beams. Tests on Structural
timbers. Cline and Heim, U.S. Dept. of Agric. Forest Ser-
vice, Bull. 108, 1912.
+ Corrected to 12% moisture.
Impact Tests.
Izod impact tests were made in conformity with the
British Engineering Standard Association Specification for
Aircraft Material.
Energy absorbed
in foot Ibs. E Wale M
Maximum Se mice ane S 9 —
Minimum Sacer 2 7 —
Mean 6 tests .. .. 8.3 7.8 hoy
‘Tests made on Oregon in stock gave the following results:
Tp. M D
“Maximum 2s) 280 tty lbs. 935 9 (1nd ai Ae ine
Minimum PUR IME MRAM. Af 5) ame nnn IE 9 8. ey ee
“Mean (12 tests) .. 230.,,.,, 22, 10,624) eeu
9713300 Ibs. ,,
DEFECTIVE OREGON. 939
*Compression parallel to grain.
C1 C E cpa. M
Maximum ... 5,500 7430 1,250,000 9 —
Mommum .. 3,875 6230 833,000 6.5 —
Mean (6 tests) 4,685 6695 999,000 85 12.7
C1 = Fibre stress at limit of proportionality in lbs. per
square inch.
C = Maximum crushing strength in lbs. per square inch.
Canada (l.c.) .. 4220 7600 2,229,000 19 10.4
meses, (.c.) .. 7290 8885 — 17.5 ee:
*Compression perpendicular to grain.
Fibre stress at hmit of proportionality in lbs. per sq. in.:
Lost.
ommum .. 2... 1440 8.5 —
fom .. wl 1325 6.0 —
Mean (5 tests) .... 1370 ead) era A
M@amada (l.e.) .. .. 997 19 10.4
eee ic.) ous 860 17.5 diate
Tension parallel to gran.
Area Breaking Load in
in sq. in. lbs. per sq. in. Ppa. M
i 0.7651 3850 9:0 14.1
2 0.7548 6995 9.0 12.8
3 0.7466 7640 1.0 14.1
4 0.7698 8060 10.5 29
Mean 6636 9.0 13.5
Koehlert gives the following mean figures for tension
parallel to grain.
1. 16,200 lbs. sq. in. M2417, D = 33 Ibs.
ee M—25.07, D = 30 lbs.
+ Koehler Properties and Uses of Woods, 1924.
240 M. B. WELCH.
*Tension perpendicular to grain.
T(a) T(b) r.p.l (aye 2 pate
Maximums):.. 52%) 300 470 7.5 9 —~
Minimum. i 115 272 6.5 6.5 —
Nean- Gi tests). 24) A777 305 ee 7.8 12.7
T =Tensile strength in lbs. per sq. in.
(a) = Plane of failure radial.
(b) == Plane of failure tangential.
(a) & (b)
Canada (l.c.) i a OO 19 10.4
U:S.A. (Le.) JIL et eo) 1% 7.8
* Hardness.
H(a) H (b) H(e)
Maximum.) ss O00 610 660
Nomimnaume 9 tr. 08 DOU) 780
Mean (7 tests) .. 548 (5tests) 589 (7 tests) 716
H =Load required to imbed a 0.444 inch ball to half
diameter.
(a) — Radial surface; (b) = tangential surface; (c) = end.
surface.
Canada (le.) .. 683 691 799
U.S.A. (Le.) ae (a) & (b) 575 670.
*Shearing Strength parallel to grain.
rp
(a) (b) (a) (b) M
Maximum .. 1490 1420lbs.persq.in. 8 10 —
Minimum ... 812 1030>,. ,,..,..5. Gene
Mean (6 tests) 1190 1266 ,, ,, 5, 5 (ogee
(a) Plane of failure radial. |
(b) Plane of failure tangential.
Canada (l.c.) .. > (a) &(b) 1271 19 10.4
USA, Che.) Poo. 6a) Galas) 1140 W3 5 TS
DEFECTIVE OREGON. 241
*Cleavage.
pl.
S(a) S(b) (a) (b) M
Maximum pte cee Bo) 140 SA). 80.0) —
Minimum fer se 1720) 160 6.0 ~~ 6.5 —
Mean (6 tests) .. 141 52 ee © ne 12.7
S = Splitting Strength in lbs. per in. of width.
(a) = Plane of failure radial.
(b) = Plane of failure tangential.
Canada (l.c.) .. -(a) & (b) 265 19 10.4
U.S.A. (l.c.) .. Cleavage tests for air dry wood not
given.
One of the most important requirements in a timber
which is subject to loads is toughness}. The term is apphed
to a number of different properties of wood, but can be
regarded as the reverse of brittleness ; it is indicated by (a)
the ability of the wood to absorb energy in impact tests,
(b) the work to maximum load in static bending tests.
An examination of the results of the static bending tests
shows that the modulus of rupture is small in comparison
with the other tests on small clear specimens, but the
figure is not abnormally low. The most striking result is
the small interval between the proportional limit and the
ultimate load, which is a definite indication of brittleness.
Further, although the resilience of the wood is normal,
the ‘‘work to maximum load’’ is very low, indicating again
a brittle timber. Similarly, the impact tests, with an
+ Den Berger, Mechanical Properties of Dutch East Indian
Timbers, No. 12. Proefstation v/h. Boschwezen, 1926, refers to
a tough wood as “one that will not rupture until it has de-
formed considerably under loads at or near its maximum
strength or one which still hangs together after it has been
ruptured and may be bent back and forth without breaking
apart, and which gives way only gradually and gives warning
of rupture. It is able to store a considerable amount of energy
and has a remarkable shock resisting ability.”
P—December 5, 1928.
242 M. B. WELCH.
energy absorption of 8.3 foot lbs. in comparison with 23.0
foot lbs. for normal Oregon, clearly show the brashness of
the wood.
Except that the wood failed, almost without warning and
with no defined lmit of proportionality, the large beam
tests did not reveal any serious lack of strength, in compari-
son with large beam tests made in U.S.A.
The stiffness of the wood, indicated by the modulus of
elasticity, was not low in comparison with many other of
the test results.
Tests made in compression parallel to the grain showed
‘that the wood was not particularly weak in this regard,
and that there is a very appreciable difference between
‘the limit of proportionality and the ultimate load, although.
less than that given for the Canadian tests.
The strength in compression perpendicular to the grain
was higher than the means given by other authorities and
seems to indicate that the ability of the tracheids to with-
stand lateral crushing is not weakened, however brittle the
‘wood might be.
As Record* states, the tensile strength, parallel to the
grain, of a wood is about three times its strength in com-
pression, but the results of the tests show that there is
practically no difference in the figures for tension and
compression obtained for the defective Oregon, whilst the
results given by Koehler (l.¢.) clearly show the very great
superiority in tensile strength of normal Oregon. It is
easy to understand, therefore, that whilst with normal wood
it is possible to bend it considerably before failure takes
place on the tension side, in wood which has the tensile
strength approximately equal to the compressive strength,
very slight bending is sufficient for the wood to fail on the
tension side and the wood is therefore brittle.
* Record, Mechanical Properties of Wood, 1914.
huge
DEFECTIVE OREGON. 243
The results of the tension perpendicular to the grain,
with a radial plane of failure are low and indicate a small
degree of lateral cohesion between the tracheids or that the
eell walls are easily split when subjected to a transverse
pull. The greater strength in tension in a radial direction,
j.e., with a tangential plane of failure, is apparently due
to the action of the medullary rays.
The hardness tests, whilst lower than the Canadian tests,
care close to those for the U.S.A. wood, for the side, and
higher for the end, and show that the wood was not soft or
spongy. As pointed out by Record (l.c.) resistance to
indentation is largely dependent on density.
The results of the shearing tests parallel to grain are
quite normal and do not indicate any weakness in this
Tespect.
Strength to resist splitting, as indicated by the cleavage
tests, is comparable with tension perpendicular to the grain.
‘The results of this series of tests (1.e., cleavage) are also low
in comparison with the Canadian figures.
Weight.
One of the most important factors influencing the
‘strength of timber is weight. In practice, weakness in
timber is usually associated with a low density and relation-
ships have been established between the various mechanical
properties of wood and specific gravity® ft.
The density of the defective wood, about 33 lbs. per
cubic foot, is not low and compares closely with the average
figures given for the material tested in Canada and U.S.A.,
and it also approximates to the mean of the specimens
* The relation of the shrinkage and strength properties of
wood to its specific gravity. Newlin and Wilson, U.S. D.A.
- Forest Service Bull. No. 676, 1919.
+ Den Berger (l.c.) outlines the various theories in reference
‘to the mechanical properties—-density relationship.
244 M. B. WELCH.
tested for comparison. There was no evidence of compres-
sion wood, which is comparatively weak. Den Berger (l.¢.)
has pointed out that specific gravity does not give any clue
to the phability or toughness of the wood and this is borne
out by the result of the impact tests.
Rate of Growth.
From a large series of tests on structural sizes made in
U.S.A.¢ the optimum rate of growth for Oregon was found
to be 24 rings per inch, but considerable variation in
strength was found, and the conclusion was reached that
‘‘yines per inch are not a reliable index to the mechanical
properties of timber, especially structural timbers contain-
ing knots and other defects.’’ Further, in particular ref-
erence to Oregon, the following conclusion was made that,.
‘‘in general, rapidly grown wood (less than eight rings per
inch) is relatively weak. 10 92 65 20
Br wheated: Pulp .. .. 4.0 i 0 21 — —
3 Pulp from good can _ 6 3 1 rir — =
Ae eeslumy Pulp, .. .. 400— 130, 82 1600 81 154
5 Pulp from burst can 274 23 OF e100 — a
*From pulping machine.
== Brom vat.
These counts agree fairly well with those made in the
United States although the direct method shows slightly
greater numbers. Samples (4) and (5) would be quite
unfit for human consumption.
The higher counts by the direct method are probably to
be accounted for by the fact that in this method all cells
in the field are counted, regardless of whether they are dead
or alive, whereas in the dilution method, only the live cells
produee colonies.
344 G. L. WINDRED.
It will be noticed that there is a striking decrease in
“numbers in the heated pulp and the 4,500,000 per c.e. prob-
ably results, for the most part, from the subsequent germi-
nation of the spores. The rise to 6,000,000 in sample (3)
may be similarly accounted for or may be due to contact
with unsterile surfaces as would be presented by the buckets
and the containers. With such numbers of bacteria as
occurred in samples (4) and (5) it is only to be expected
that profound changes would occur in the pulp, spoiling it
for further use.
Qualitative Determinations.
From the plates used in the counting by the dilution
method, nine different colonies were selected for identifi-
cation. Standard agar slopes were made from the colonies
and after incubating at 32°C. for 24 hours were replated in
order to test purity of the cultures.
A pure culture of each organism having been obtained,
the cultural, morphological and biochemical characters of
each were studied according to the procedure advised by
the Society of American Bacteriologists. The organisms
were named according to the scheme set out in Bergey’s
Manual (2) further corroboration being obtained from the
more detailed descriptions in the Journal of Bacteriology
(3).
The following organisms were identified :—
1. Bacillus vulgatus Flugge.
megatheritum De Bary.
niger Migula.
. graveolens Gittheil.
ellenbachiensis Stutzer.
. atterimus Leh. and New.
subtilis (Ehrenberg) Cohn..
mycoides Fliugge.
. Aerobacter cloacae.
CMI wh wh
by bu by by ty ty by
ORGANISMS OF TOMATO PULP. 345
It will be noted that none of these are known to be
pathogenic, and also, that all except Aerobacter cloacae are
spore formers and therefore quite capable of withstanding
the temperature of the heating vat and so of being able to
germinate when the temperature of the pulp falls, which is
after the cans have been sealed. It is also significant that
all of them produce acid from carbohydrates and as will be
seen later this has a bearing on the bursting of the cans.
Now since Aerobacter cloacae does not produce spores its
presence in a sample of heated pulp has to be accounted
for. Members of this group have been found in pasteurised
milk so that it is capable of withstanding fairly high tem-
peratures. Otherwise it may gain access to the cans by
leaks in faulty cans, or may enter before the can is sealed
and after it has cooled considerably.
Slime Production.
Pulp which has become slimy has a very characteristic
appearance somewhat resembling a thick starch paste but
more coherent. When the slimy condition is at its maxi-
mum and most viscous, it is not possible to lift it up with a
fork or glass rod as it slips off or breaks away. The
cohesion is sufficient, however, to allow slime-threads of
about 10 em. to be drawn out.
An organism was isolated from a sample of slimy pulp
and numbered 10. Small portions of the slimy pulp were
plated by the usual methods and with the exception of a
few colonies of a mucor species, which always seems to be
associated with the slimy condition, the bacterial colonies
were all of the same appearance. Thus the slimy pulp
was practically a pure culture of No. 10.
After the isolation of this organism and its transfer to
standard agar slopes a test tube full of sterile pulp was
inoculated with a heavy dose of organism. The slimy condi-
346 G. L. WINDRED.
tion appeared in 72 hours at room temperature (18°C.)
After a period of about 17 days the condition began to dis-
appear (of course the duration of the sliminess would
depend on many factors such as temperature, mass of pulp,
amount of inoculum, ete.). With the gradual disappear-
ance of the slime, a layer of clear amber coloured liquid
appeared on the surface of the pulp. At the end of 32
days the sliminess had quite disappeared and the layer of
clear liquid occupied about one quarter of the test-tube.
The sedimented pulp became much lighter in colour and
had a flocculent appearance. There was a very noticeable
sour odour following the disappearance of the slime, other-
wise the material remained differentiated into clear super-
natant fluid and flocculent ‘‘precipitate’’ till the end of
the experiment, i.e., for six weeks, without marked change.
On plating out some of this material the same colony for-
mation was noticed as at first and on re-inoculating some
sterile pulp with this inoculum the slimy condition was
again produeed. Thus it is highly probable that this
organism, No. 10, is the cause of the sliminess. However,
since no capsule or envelope could be demonstrated round
the organism it is assumed that it is not the organism itself
which brings about the slimy condition, but rather some
product of its metabolism.
The following is a brief deseription of No. 10:—
Morphology.—Long rods with rounded ends, measuring
4u by .754 on an average. Shadow forms common.
Arranged singly or in long chains.
Spore-formation. Forms spores early, central in position
and sometimes excentric. Cause slight bulge in organism.
Average measurement of 1.54 by .du.
Mobility.—Very active in young cultures. Flagella peri-
trichous and numerous.
ORGANISMS OF TOMATO PULP. 347
Agur Slope.—Moderate growth with a well defined ridge.
Tends to spread giving in older cultures a rhizoid appear-
ance. Opaque, raised, smcoth, membranous, moist and
pure white.
Agar Colonies.—Rapid growth. Different forms, some
round and regular, others amoeboid. Surface smooth,
moist, glistening, raised, opaque and pure white. A ridge
appears near the periphery giving a shallow crater-like
appearance.
Gelatine Stab.—Growth best at the top. Line of puncture
filiform. Liquefaction infundibuliform. Medium liquefied
fairly rapidly.
Broth.—A fragile pellicle formed with shght turbidity
near surface. Clears by sedimentation. Long chains.
Potato.—Creamy-white profuse growth, spreading, raised,
glistening, very rugose, slimy, membranous consistency.
Decided odour.
Glucose Agar.—Rapid growth, filiform but spreading.
Flat, dull, rugose, opaque, cream, butyrous.
Gram Stain.—Positive.
Glucose Broth—Acid, no gas.
Lactose Broth.—Alkaline, no gas.
Sucrose Broth.—Aeid, no gas.
Milk.—Rapid casein digestion with clear, amber-coloured
fluid in upper part of tube.
Intmus Milk.—Slightly acid in 48 hours with slight
coagulation followed by digestion.
Pigment.—None.
This description resembles closely that of Bacillus rumi-
natus Gottheil except that it forms long chains in broth
and milk. Also, in agar colonies, no shell-like periphery
348 G. L. WINDRED.
was observed as has been attributed to B. ruminatus. In
all other characters, however, it resembles fairly closely this
Species and may be a variety of it.
Many cans, both the large kerosene cans and the smaller
sizes show a swelling due to increase of internal pressure.
At times this pressure increases to such an extent that the
can bursts, and in the case of the large bulk cans, with
such a force that the whole stack may be thrown down. A
large proportion of kerosene-cans of pulp burst, owing,
probably, to the fact that they are not so well made as the
smaller two-pound tins.
The gas may be produced in two ways: (1) by the action
of the Coli group of organisms on the carbohydrates of the
pulp thus liberating CO, and H,, and (2) by the action
of the acid juices on the metal of the container (4).
In the first case when tins of sterile pulp were inoculated |
with a vigorous culture of Aerobacter cloacae and incubated
at 37°C. the cans became swollen and burst in 17 days.
Since this organism produces both CO, and acid in the pulp,
the pressure caused by the CO, is augmented by the hbera-
tion of hydrogen by the action of the acid produced on the
metal of the container. This pressure is sufficient to burst
open the seams of a two-pound ean.
In the second ease all the organisms isolated produced
acid so that if any great number of organisms remain in the
ean after processing there is the possibility of them produc-
ing enough acid to attack untinned portions of the ean and
thus liberate hydrogen. The pulp itself shows an acidity of
0.45%, calculated as citrie acid, so that together with the
products of the bacteria present a considerable acidity may
develop, which, if not sufficient to produce enough gas to
burst the can, may bulge the ends of the ean considerably.
ORGANISMS OF TOMATO PULP. o49
Summary.
Great losses occur due to microbial spoilage of tomato-
pulp. Counts of organisms in five samples of tomato-pulp
were made including material from burst cans and slimy
pulp. Very large numbers of bacteria were present in the
last mentioned samples. Ten organisms were isolated from
pulp, nine of which are spore-formers, the remaining one
being Aerobacter cloacae.
An organism which causes sliminess in the pulp resembles
Bacillus rununatus Gottheil very closely. Characteristics
of the organism are described.
Gas production causing bursting of the cans is due to
two causes, (1) the action of acid on the metal of the con-
tainer, and (2) the production of CO, by bacteria.
(Communicated by Gilbert Wright.)
This investigation was carried out in the Faculty of Agri-
culture, University of Sydney, under the direction of Mr. G.
Wright. Acknowledgments are due to Professor R. D. Watt
for reviewing the manuscript.
LITERATURE CITATIONS.
(1) HOWARD, B. J.—Microscopical studies on tomato products.
ess Dept. Aor, Bul. 581, 1917.
(2) BERGEY, D. H.—Manual of determinative bacteriology,
1923. 1st ed. Baltimore. Williams and Wilkins Co.
(3) LAURENCE, J. S., and FORD, W. W.—Aerobic, spore-
bearing, non-pathogenic bacteria. Jnl. Bact. (Balt.),
Voll. INO. 3, pp. 213-519,. May, 1916:
LAUBACH, C. A., and RICH, J. L.—Aerobic, spore-form-
ing, non-pathogenic bacteria. Jnl. Bact. (Balt.), vol.
I, No. 5; pp. 493-5382, Sept., 1916.
(4) BIGELOW, W. D.—Springers and perforations in canned
foods. Nat. Canners’ Res. Lab. Cire. 1-L, 1922.
(5) CRUESS, W. V.—Commercial fruit and vegetable products,
1925, ist. ed. New York, McGraw Hill Book Co.
300 M. B. WELCH.
NOTES ON SOME AUSTRALIAN TIMBERS
OF THE MONIMIACEA.
M. B. WELCH, -B:Se,, AGN.
Economic Botanist, Technological Museum.
(With Plates XXVI.-XXIX.)
(Read before the Royal Society of New South Wales, Dec. 5, 1928.)
Several Australian genera belonging to the Moninuacee,
a family principally occurring in tropical and subtropical
regions, yield useful timbers. Of the eight Australian
genera* recorded by Bentham, two are woody climbers,
whilst several are too rare to be of commercial importance.
The Australian representatives are chiefly confined to the
eastern rain forest areas of the mainland, with one genus,
Atherosperma, occurring in Tasmania.
The following anatomical descriptions apply to specimens
of the various woods in the Technological Museum
collection.
DORYPHORA SASSAFRAS, Endlicher.
Sassafras, Grey or Black Sassafras.
A medium-sized tree found in the brush forests and on
alluvial pockets in gullies, throughout eastern New South
Wales and extending into southern Queensland. The wood
is very close textured, almost ‘‘pine-like,’’ and pale
yellowish in colour, becoming darker on _ exposure.
‘Occasionally dark, irregular streaks are present, especially
near the heart, which is occasionally almost jet black.
The freshly sawn wood, or even a fresh surface on
seasoned wood, usually possesses a pleasant safro!-like
* Bentham, G. Flora Australiensis, Vol. 5, p. 283, 1870.
NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN TIMBERS. 301
odour, but this is soon lost on exposure. The wood is not
particularly durable, but is apparently immune from attacks
by borers, whilst it is said to resist white ants. It works
easily, is not fissile, but is inclined to be woolly. The wood is
usually without distinctive figure. The weight is moderate,
from 30-40 Ibs. per cubic foot. Average laterai hardness
= 975 lbs.t
Uses—Available in fairly large quantities and chiefly
used for broom handles, brush stocks, stained for cheap
furniture, toys, flooring, lining, case material. It is very
suitable for automatic turnery. It has also been used for
clothes-pegs and tallow cask staves.
Source of material examined: Museum collection; trade
supplies.
Macroscopical Characters.—Pores very small, indistin-
oulishable with the naked eye. Soft tissue not apparent.
Rays easily visible on end section or on a radial face, some-
what lehter in colour than ground tissue. Growth rings
not distinct.
Microscopical Characters. — Pores evenly distributed,
usually single or in small groups of 2 or 3, frequently
showing partitions due to sealariform bars, occasionally in
rows, but more usually separated by very much compressed
tracheidal cells; irregularly polygonal or rounded in out-
line; radial diameter 45-140u, mean 90; tangential
diameter 35-110u, mean 65y; length of vessel segments,
900-2500-; walls 234; end perforation strongly scalariform,
bars numerous, up to 100, with correspondingly very taper-
ing segment end; lateral pits few, small-bordered, circular,
irregularly arranged, or numerous large, simple, oval or
slit-like and scalariform in contact with rays, inter vessel
+ Hardness figure is the load required to imbed 0.444” ball to
half depth.
352 M. B. WELCH.
pits scalariform bordered; average number per sq. mm. 65;
tyloses not observed. Wood fibres very variable in shape
and size, thick-walled, often very long, measuring from
1000-2800; average diameter 30y, walls 7-llp; pit open-
ings slit-hke, more or less bordered; transition observed
to more copiously pitted tracheidal cells, especially in
contact with vessels; frequently septate. Wood parenchyma
scanty, diffuse, often appearing as heavily-pitted, septate,
prosenchymatous units; usually present in radial rows.
which correspond to the attenuated ends of the rays, but
are not continuous when seen in transverse section. Rays
strongly heterogeneous, uniseriate or usually biseriate or
triseriate, up to 554 in width and 2000, in height, ends
tapering to narrow cells corresponding in width to the
vertical elements of the wood; thus the normal width of
a horizontal ray cell is about 40u; at the ends of the ray
the cells usually become almost square and may become
drawn out to a vertical height of as much as 300» and
20-30» in width, or two multiseriate portions may be linked
with a single row of vertically elongated cells; 3-5 per mm.
of transverse section.
Aqueous extract very light brown, very little alteration
with ferric chloride, caustic potash, turbid with lead
acetate.
When burnt, smoulders to greyish-white ash with small
amount of unburnt carbon.
ATHEROSPERMA MOSCHATUM, Labillardiere.
Tasmanian Sassafras.
A large tree, up to 100 feet in height, found in moist
gullies principally throughout Tasmania and also in
southern and eastern Victoria and in the south-eastern part
of New South Wales.
ny
NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN TIMBERS. 355
The wood is almost white to light brown in colour, but
often with dark streaks or zones near the heart, close-
textured, often resembling European Maple or Sycamore,
Acer sp. It is without odour, although the bark is very
aromatic; works easily and cleanly, and is altogether a
very useful timber. There is usually no pronounced figure,
although on a tangentially cut or ‘‘backed-off’’ surface the
variation in density in the growth ring causes a slight
‘‘ribbon grain.’’ The wood is tough, not fissile, not durable
in exposed positions, and is lable to attack by the Furni-
ture Beetle, Anobium domesticum.
Average lateral hardness = 10385 lbs. Weight = 87-41
Ibs. per cubic foot.
Uses.—An excellent timber for automatic turnery, e.g.,
small handles, ete., and is probably the best Australian
wood for eclothes-pegs. It has been used for interior
fittings, cabinet work, brush stocks, light handles, wooden
screws, cask staves, wooden buckets, finishing lasts, carving.
Source of material examined: Museum collection; trade
supphes. |
Macroscopical Characters.—Pores very small, not distin-
sulshable with naked eye. Soft tissue not apparent. Rays
fine, evenly distributed, easily visible on end or radial
surfaces, appearing somewhat darker than the ground
tissue. Growth rings not prominently defined. Sapwood
not defined.
Microscopical Characters. — Pores evenly distributed,
frequently single or in groups of 2-4 irregularly arranged,
not in radial rows, irregularly polygonal in outline; radial
diameter 35-854, mean, 554; tangential diameter 30-55n,
mean 45; length of vessel segments 900-1500; walls 2-3
in thickness; end perforation very oblique, strongly sealari-
form, not always at end of segment, and sometimes extend-
W-— December 5, 1928.
3D4 M. B. WELCH.
ing for half its length; bars up to 100 in number; lateral
pits elongated, elliptical or slit-hke, often scalariform,
small, circular-bordered and few in number in contact with
fibres; tyloses not observed; average number per sq. mm.,
155. Wood fibres rather thick-walled, véry irregular in
size and shape; average diameter 22; 900-2000n in length;
wall 5-8; pits small, slit-like, borders usually very distinct ;
very rarely septate. Wood parenchyma scanty, diffuse,
chiefly present as non-continucus radial lines corresponding
to attenuated ray ends. Rays usually heterogeneous, outer
cells often elongated but not so prominently as in D.
sassafras, at times almost homogeneous, uniseriate to multi-
seriate, as many as 5 cells in width, maximum width 70p;
up to 1200 in length but normally not more than 900,;
oceasionally ends of rays multiseriate and middle reduced
to one cell in width; ray cells frequently with dark
granular contents; 4-7 per mm. of transverse section.
Growth rings indistinct and due to radial compression of
a few rows of wood fibres.
Aqueous extract very pale yellow, often turbid due to
starch; usually greenish colouration with ferric chloride;
darkened with caustic potash; little alteration to marked
turbidity with lead acetate.
Shavings burn to greyish or white ash; smoulders slowly
with medium amount of unburnt carbon.
DAPHNANDRA MICRANTHA, Bentham.
Yellow-wood, Satin-wood, Yellow or Grey Sassafras,
Yellow Box, Socket-wood, Butter-wood.
A moderate-sized tree found in the coastal brushes of
northern New South Wales and extending into Queensland.
The wood is greyish-yellow to yellow in colour, becoming
brown on exposure ; close-textured, resembling D. sassafras,
but is usually less aromatic in odour, works more cleanly
alll
NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN TIMBERS. 355
‘and is usually rather harder and heavier. It is tough and
non-fissile. Usually no pronouneed figure.
Average lateral hardness = 1045 lbs.; weight 28-45 lbs.
per eubie foot.
Uses——Turned articles, small tool handles, door knobs,
brush stocks, broom handles, flooring, lining, interior
fittings, case material.
Source of material examined: Museum collection;
‘Queensland Forest Service.
Macroscopical Characters.—Pores very small, not distin-
guishable with the naked eye, but easily seen with pocket
magnifier. Soft tissue not apparent. Rays fine, but distinct
and easily seen on end or radial surfaces, lighter in colour
than ground tissue. Growth rings not prominent, usually
seen as fine lines. Sapwood not defined.
Microscopical Characters.—Pores very evenly distributed,
frequently single, or in small groups of 2-5, irregularly
rounded or polygonal in outline; radial diameter 20-75z,
mean 5d; tangential diameter 20-654, mean 50; length of
vessel segments 750-1400; walls 2-34 in thickness; end
perforations very oblique, scalariform, bars numerous, up
to 50; lateral pits elongated, elliptical or slit-like, often
Sealariform ; vessel-fibre pits small, circular, sparsely dis-
tributed; tyloses not observed; average number per sq.
mm., 100. Wood fibres thick-walled, very irregular in size
and shape, average diameter, 30%; 1200-2100» in length;
walls 7-11ly; pits slit-like, borders small; fibres occasionally
septate. Wood parenchyma scanty, diffuse, in thick-walled,
heavily-pitted septate prosenchymatous units; principally
seen in transverse section as discontinuous radial rows due
to ray ends. Rays diffuse, heterogeneous; outer cells
elongated but much less than in D. sassafras or A.
moschatum; usually multiseriate, from triseriate up to six
356 M. B. WELCH.
cells in width; diameter up to 110y; length up to 2.0 mm. ;.
3-4 per mm. of cross section. Growth rings marked by
radial compression of a few rows of wood fibre cells.
Sections cut of the outer part of the wood showed a
considerable amount of starch to be present, not only in
the rays and longitudinal parenchyma, but also in the
thick-walled wood fibres. There seems no doubt but that
these cells are used for food storage.
Aqueous extract lemon yellow; very little darkening |
with ferric chloride or caustic potash; slight turbidity and
precipitate with lead acetate.
Shavings burn to greyish or white ash, the amount of
smouldering and unburnt carbon varying from large to:
medium with different samples.
DAPHNANDRA REPANDULA, F. v. Mueller.
Sassafras or Grey Sassafras.
A moderate-sized tree found in the brush forests of
northern Queensland.
The wood is yellowish to brownish-yellow in colour,
close-textured and resembles D. micrantha.
Average lateral hardness = 1075 lbs. Weight about 40)
Ibs. per cubic foot.
Uses.—Similar to D. micrantha.
Source of material examined: Queensland Forest Service.
Macroscopical Characters Similar to D. micrantha.
Microscopical Characters.— Pores evenly distributed,
usually irregularly rounded in shape or occasionally
angular; single or in irregular groups of 2-5, often in
short radial rows or separated by very compressed fibre
tracheids; radial diameter 50-110u, mean 65; tangential
diameter 35-90, mean 60,4; length of vessel segments 900-
NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN TIMBERS. 357
2100; walls 2-234; end perforation often extremely
oblique, scalariform, bars up to 60; lateral pits scalariform,
sometimes oval in contact with ray cells, rounded, small
and seattered in contact with mechanical tissue; the vessels
are often fusiform and differ lttle in size and shape from
the larger wood fibres (fibre tracheids) ; tyloses not observed ;
average number per sq. mm., 90. Wood fibres thick-walled ;
irregular in size and shape; average diameter 30u; length
1500-2700; walls 5-74; pits slit-like, borders very small
and at times apparently simple; occasionally septate.
‘Tracheids occasionally present measuring up to 2000u in
length, with numerous small bordered pits. Wood
parenchyma scanty, diffuse, septate-prosenchymatous, often
‘seen in transverse sections as discontinuous radial rows
due to ray ends. Rays diffuse with tendency to become
aggregate; heterogeneous, with considerably elongated end
‘cells much more strongly developed than in D. micrantha,
the uniseriate portion sometimes extending a _ greater
length than the multiseriate part’; usually multiseriate
up to 5 cells in width or 75y; occasionally biseriate; up
to 3.0 mm. in length; average number per mm. of cross-
‘section, 4. Growth rings not pronounced, due to radial
compression of a few rows of cells.
Aqueous extract pale yellow, similar to D. micrantha
in behaviour with ferric chloride, caustic potash and lead
acetate. |
Shavings burn to small greyish ash, medium amount
unburnt carbon.
DAPHNANDRA AROMATICA, Bailey.
Sassafras or Grey Sassafras.
A moderate-sized tree found in the brush forests of
northern Queensland.
358 M. B. WELCH.
The wood is yellowish-brown in colour, close-textured, and
resembles D. micrantha, except that the Museum specimens:
are softer.
Average lateral hardness = 560 Ibs. Weight 30-35 lbs. per
eubie ft.
Uses.—Similar to D. micrantha.
Source of material examined: Queensland Forest Service..
Macroscopical Characters.—Practically similar to D.
micrantha, but pores rather larger and just visible with
naked eye in Museum specimens.
Microscopical Characters.—Pores very evenly distributed,,.
comparatively even in size, irregularly polygonal; usually
single, occasionally in small irregular groups, radial dia-
meter 65-1502, mean 90u; tangential diameter 55-1004 mean
Tou; length of vessel segments 1200-2000; walls 2-34; end
perforations very oblique, strongly scalariform, bars up to-
80; lateral pits, elongated, often scalariform, fibre-vessel
pits scattered, circular, bordered; vessels frequently re-
semble tracheids in size and shape; tyloses not observed ;,
number per sq. mm. 65. Wood fibres moderately thick-
walled, irregular in size and shape, average diameter 35p;
length 1000-2600u; walls 4-6; pits usually narrow elliptical
with distinct borders, but occasionally border not distinct.
Wood parenchyma not abundant, diffuse, appearing im
radial rows in transverse section due to elongated ray ends ;.
rays diffuse, heterogeneous, the uniseriate elongated end
cells considerably extended; variable in shape, often with
multiseriate ends and uniseriate in middle; up to 4 cells or
60» in width and 1500 in length; 3-5 per mm. of cross
section.
Aqueous extract pale yellow, similar in behaviour to:
D. mocraniha.
NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN TIMBERS. 359
Shavings smoulder to smail greyish ash and large amount
of unburnt carbon.
MOLLINEDIA HUEGELIANA, Tulasne.
A small tree, not common in the brushes of eastern New
South Wales and Queensiand.
fhe wood is yellow brown in colour, often with irregular
dark streaks, close textured, moderately hard, tough and non
fissile. It possesses a prominent ray figure when quarter
Cite
Average lateral hardness = 13880 lbs. Weight about 45
Ibs. per cubic foot.
Uses.—Rarely seen on the market except in mixed brush-
woods. Should be suitable for ornamental turnery, small
cabinet work and similar purposes.
Souree of material examined: Museum collection.
Macroscopical Characters.—Pores indistinguishable with
naked eye. Soft tissue not apparent. Rays very prominent
on end or radial surfaces. Growth rings scarcely defined.
Sapwood not defined.
Microscopical Characters.—Pores evenly distributed,
single or in groups of 2-5, sometimes in radial rows; usually
irregularly rounded in shape; radial diameter 22-754, mean
oom, tangential diameter 30-754, mean 55yu; vessel segments
660-1400 in length; walls 3-4.5u; end perforation not so
oblique as in D. sassafras, sealariform. bars up to 25; lateral
pits small rounded or oval, bordered, more crowded than in
other species, larger and often scalariform in contact with
rays or vessels; tyloses not observed; average number per
sq. mm. 59. Wood fibres very thick walled; average dia-
meter 30p; length 1000-2200y; walls 5-13y; pits indistinctly
bordered, openings slit-like ; septate fibres not seen, but occa-
sionally fibres divided into two distinct cells by a transverse
360 M. B. WELCH.
wall. Wood parenchyma diffuse, in heavily pitted thick
walled prosenchymatous units; or seen in transverse section
as radial rows corresponding to ray ends. Rays heterogene-
ous; diffuse with tendency to become aggregate; multiseri-
ate up to 300 in width and 15mm. in height. Rays per
mm. of cross section, 1-3. Growth rings not prominent,
indicated by somewhat greater thickening of cell walls.
Aqueous extract very pale yellow; very little darkening
with ferric chloride or caustic potash; slight turbidity and
precipitate with lead acetate.
Shavings smoulder to brownish or greyish white ash, with
medium amount of unburnt carbon.
HEDYCARYA ANGUSTIFOLIA, A, Cunningham.
Wild Mulberry.
A medium-sized to small tree found in creek beds and
guilies in Victoria and eastern New South Wales.
The wood is yellow to greyish-brown in colour, close-tex-
tured, soft and easily worked, and when of low density
inclined to be spongy. Distinct ray figure when quarter-
eut. Average lateral hardness = 495 lbs. Weight 22-30 lbs.
per cubie ft.
Uses.—Rarely seen on the market, suitable for small
cabinet work.
Source of material examined: Museum collection.
Macroscopical Characters.——Pores practically indistin-
guishable with naked eye. Soft tissue not apparent. Rays
prominent on end or radial surfaces, appearing darker than
ground tissue. Sapwood rather paler than heartwood but
not sharply defined. Growth rings not prominent.
Microscopical Characters——Pores fairly evenly distri-
buted, irregularly polygonal in outline, single, or in irregu-
lar groups from 2-7, or in short radial rows; radial diameter
NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN TIMBERS. 361
35-105u, mean Tou; tangential diameter 35-854, mean 60y;
vessel segments 500-9002; walls 2-3», end perforation
oblique, scalariform, bars up to 20 in number; lateral pits
large oval or elongated, often becoming scalariform ; vessel-
fibre pits small rounded or oval; tyloses not observed ;
average number per sq. mm. 30. Wood fibres comparatively
thin walled, average diameter 304; 750-1700» in length;
walls 3-54 in thickness; occasionally septate; pits small,
usually with small borders, occasionally divided into two
distinet cells by transverse walls. Wood parenchyma dif-
fuse, or in thick walled septate parenchymatous units, cor-
responding in size and shape to the fibrous elements;
numerous transition stages observed between fibre and
parenchymatous cells. Rays heterogeneous, aggregate,
oblique sections of vessels or fibres frequently appear 1iso-
lated in a tangential section of a ray; multiseriate, up to
390 in width and 3.5 mm. in height; ray volume often very
high, especially in specimens of wood with low density ;
number per mm. of cross section 1-2.
Aqueous extract brownish in colour, brownish or greenish
eolouration and precipitate with ferric chloride; brown
with caustic potash; slight precipitate with lead acetate.
Shavings burn to black residue with little smouldering
and no light coloured ash.
The following key is given for the identification of the
woods :—
(a) Rays large and prominent on end or radial face.
(b) Rays often exceeding 10 mm. in height = Mol-
linedia Hwegeliana.
(b,) Rays never exceeding 10 mm. in height = Hedy-
cayra angustifolia.
(a,) Rays small not prominent on end or radial face.
Ld
362 M. B. WELCH.
(c) Pores very small, numerous, over 125 per sq.
mm., wood pale coloured = Atherosperma mos-
chata.
(c,) Pores small, less than 125 per sq. mm. wood
yellow.
(d) Rays not exceeding 3 cells in width = Doryphora
sassafras.
(d,) Rays often exceeding 8 cells in width.
Daphnandra spp.
Points of difference between the various species of
Daphnandra are given under the descriptions for the indi-
vidual species. There are decided variations in ray widths,
pores per sq. mm., and pore size, but insufficient samples
were available for examination to state definitely whether
these characters are constant.
Summary.
The genera Doryphora, Atherosperma and Daphnandra
belonging to the Atherospermew* furnish close textured
‘“pine-hke’’ timbers usually without any characteristic
figure, whilst in the Momimiew, Hedycarya, Mollinedia and
Kibara possess woods with large prominent rays. Unfor-
tunately, no authentic timber specimens of the last genus.
were available; the wood is comparatively rare and is not
available commercially.
The woods are pale in colour, the whitest being Athero-
sperma moschatum. Mollinedia Huegeliana is the heaviest
and hardest of the group. The growth rings are not defined
nor is there usually any distinet sapwood. Dark, occasion-
ally almost black, streaks and zones have been observed in
Doryphora, Atherosperma, Daphnandra and Mollinedia.
The cell walls become dark yellow-brown in colour and the
*Bentham and Hooker, genera Plantarum, vol. 3, p. 139, 1883.
NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN TIMBERS. 363°
rays and parenchymatous cells filled with a dark substance.
The cause of the stain is apparently fungal.
The vessels are in all cases evenly distributed, with
decidedly scalariform end perforation, and show extreme
elongation, the segments reaching a length of 23 mm. in
D. sassafras. The inter-vessel pits are typically scalariform
and bordered. The smaller vessel-fibre pits are usually few
and scanty in the Atherospermew. The maximum average
pore number of 155 per unit area occurs in Atherosperma
moschata and the minimum of 30, in Hedycarya angusti-
folia. Tyloses were not observed.
Typical tracheids are rarely present, the mechanical tis-
sue consisting principally of wood fibres (fibre tracheids),
usually with very thick walls and more or less developed
bordered pits. Solereder* states that the prosenchymatous
eround-work of the wood bears simple pits in Hedycarya
and Daphnandra, indistinctly bordered pits in Mollinedia
and typical bordered pits in Atherosperma and Doryphora.
In the material examined bordered pits undoubtedly occur
in the fibre tracheids of Daphnandra, but the borders are
less distinct in Hedycarya. The degree of development of
the border varies considerably in the one species and this
feature does not seem to possess any very Important diag-
nostic value. Septate wood fibres were found in all genera
except Mollinedia. Septate wood fibres with simple pits,
recorded by Solereder (l.c.) as occurring in all species, were
not found, although prosenchymatous, septate, thick walled,
sumply pitted wood parenchymatous elements are present ;
these undoubtedly show close affinity between the wood
parenchyma and the fibre cells. Further in Daphnandra
micrantha, a considerable number of the thick walled fibre
* Solereder, Systematic Anatomy of the Dicotyledons. English
Translation, Vol. 2, p. 701, 1908.
“364 M. B. WELCH.
cells contained numerous starch granules; although food
storage is supposed to be the function of living cells, there
was nothing to distinguish these cells from the typical wood
fibres. The fibres reach a considerable length in some spe-
cies e.g. 2,800 in Doryphora sassafras and over 24 mm. in
Daphnandra repandula and D. aromatica.
The wood parenchyma is usually rather sparsely distri-
buted, but due to the considerable elongation and attenu-
ation of the ends of the: medullary rays, the outer cells
correspond in shape and size with the normal vertical
parenchyma, and thus bring the rays into very intimate
contact with the other elements of the wood.
The rays are heterogeneous, with the end attenuation
especially developed in Daphnandra aromatica and Dory-
phora sassafras and least in Mollinedia Huegeliana. In
Mollinedia and Hedycarya the rays reach their maximum
width of about 300u, whilst in the other genera examined
rarely exceed 100u. The maximum height of 15.0 mm. is
found in Mollinedia. The rays do not appear to be more
than triseriate in Doryphora and Atherosperma, but ocea-
sionally attain a width of six cells in Daphnandra.
In conclusion I wish to acknowledge the help given by
Messrs. D. Cannon and F. B. Shambler of the Museum Staff
in the preparation of the specimens.
EXPLANATION OF PLATE.
Fig.1.—Doryphora sassafras. Transverse section of wood show-
ing even pore distribution; the transverse septa seen in many of
the vessels are due to the scalariform bars. The wood fibres are
very thick walled. The vessels are frequently only separated by
considerably compressed fibre cells. x 37.
Fig. 2—Atherosperma moschatum. Transverse section of wood
showing even distribution of very small pores. The discontinuous
nature of the radial rows of vertically elongated parenchyma
due to the attenuated ray ends is clearly indicated. KOSH
Plate XX VT.
Journal Royal Society of N.S.W., Vol. LXIT., 1928.
Pe ORE
ee ee eee geen
ee et aes PtP Web ge
Ace een aepetend ore SEIS
Pe MES Sete
* BR eke de ee
: ; oe ate eg OS NT
Ke 3 Soe REDO ter ean ts
ore igh Sotto : Set
ects BA ee ky Re te
at
~
‘i ce en eso
Roe ae
Seg eae sm at
CEE he HEI tytn Ee
ee TIS ES TT
AEP Reese! A oe iy Secchi HA od peas a
ae. ig nete See ES ere & v ae
Soe eet es
eet
Waters eee ke
sc ethee ea Aa, fie oe
aC a Seite yt he Ne
Spee et:
aH DECRERES 2 Ce aa
Oe Seo Soe ON KS
‘ ¥
Sits
ERR”
Tey
weet he
Journal Royal Society of N.S.W., Vol. LXII., 1928. Plate XXVIT.
Oo:
Che ee? ( r
9 Pe Gi
v3 al pA aust
Ne fe Sad
ha
ae HS
be oe Se,
: My
eee Pood
oa
Dt ed
ey 0; ee $e gant 243 Bes a
cee: giOieles 3
OR HILAR
eyes
a
ae
ere
nie
ay
ast é
Oe”
RR OE porn Pe
ee St es SEC O28 ny
‘et res me Ly sac = wen
EILEEN Se eA ee
Bee CE Ia
ee = — 73.9.
The acetyl derivative was prepared by heating 1 gram of
the purified glucoside with 10 grams of acetic anhydride and
2 grams of sodium acetate for 45 minutes. After allowing
the mixture to cool, water was added and warmed on a water
bath for 30 minutes to decompose excess of acetic anhy-
dride; the acetyl derivative separated on cooling in small
colourless needles, which after twice ecrystallising from
dilute alcohol melted at 125°.
0.1255 gave 0.2578 CO. and 0.0617 H.O. C= 56.95 :
H = 5.55.
CusHi, (COCH,). NO: requires GO ='57,02 Eo
0.4146 dissolved in 50 e.e. absolute alcohol gave in a
2-dem. tube at 23° «, —0.89° whenee [vo]? = — 53.6.
CYANOGENETIC GLUCOSIDES. 371
These figures agree with those obtained for sambunigrin,
the glucoside of Sambucus nigra, and there can be no reason-
able doubt as to the identity of the two. For comparison
the constants of the two substances and their acetyl deri-
~vatives are set out below.
The figures for acetyl-sambunigrin are those found for
the synthetic product prepared by Emil Fischer and Berg-
‘mann.3
Sambunigrin Glucoside from A. glaucescens
MEAEDOM .., ss ss 56.88 (a) 56.78
(b) 56.72
Hydrogen ... .. 5.83 (a) 5.81
(b) 5.80
‘Optical Rotation .. [gq]15 — 76.3 [a]24 — 73.9
Melting Point .. Sinters at 149° Melts at 152°
Melts at. 151°-152°
Tetra-acetyl Sambunigrin Tetra-acetyl derivative of
Glucoside from A. glaucescens
‘Optical Rotation.. [q]22 — 52.5 li@l23: == bar6
Melting Point .. >= 26° 125°
Amount of HCN in Acacia glaucescens.
In the table A are collected some figures showing the
‘amount of hydrocyanic acid present in this plant. It
is too early to say what, if any, significance is attached to
the distinct fall in the amount observed in the Spring.
Acacia Cheelu, Blakeley.
We have also isolated sambunigrin from Acacia Cheelu
‘by the process described above.
Euphorbia drummondu, Boiss.
Probably few plants in Australia have been the subject
‘of so much controversy as to their toxicity to stock as
Euphorbia drummondi, the Milk Weed. Maiden‘ reviewing
the available evidence stated that thousands of people -con-
3 Ber. d. d. chem. Ges. 1917, 50, 1047.
4 Agric. Gaz. N.S.W. 1897, 8, 18.
372 H. FINNEMORE AND C. B. COX.
TABLE A.
Amount of HCN in Acacia glaucascens (phyllodes.)
o &D ae noe. m1 ,3°S ar
2a ll Siecle ee oo]!
Reference! gource, | Date | Date |SESRISSES (833 5|8S2'5|
Number. Collected | Received.i|, 2 adie, “Sila Bolazos
& 0.9, (98 ROAD BSS ob
a, ATS ar ane 1 eal bae=A 8
P.I. 1] Glenfield | Nov. ’27| Nov. ’27 0.22*
Paleoe ip cae 27/3/28 | 62.5°| 0.12 | 0.82 | Not
done
Pol. 121 a Ase 7/6/28 | 45.0 | 0.20 | 0.37 sis
PI. 199 és ay 18/7/28 | 49.8 | 0.21 | 0.42 | 9.41
P.1. 454 * 24/9/28 | 5/10/28 | 31.0 | 0.08 | 0.12 | 0.12 |
*Determination not carried out until Jan., 1928.
sidered it poisonous, and on the other hand quoted the
opinion of the late Mr. Edward Stanley5, Chief Government
Veterinarian of N.S.W., who, after a considerable number
of experiments on sheep, failed to produce any poisonous
symptoms whatever, and concluded that the reported deaths
were due to indigestion or to diseases such as anthrax. In
support of the view of the harmlessness of this plant is the:
common experience of pastoralists of its use as fodder,
constituting as it does in certain circumstances, the only
food available. In such eases, sheep feeding on it in quan-
tity are subject to the possibility of developing hoven:
through gorging, just as may happen through the ingestion:
of excessive amounts of any other harmless green crop.
Other writers in later years have referred to the uncer-
tainty regarding this plant and have stressed the real need
for more exact data.
In these circumstances the Poison Plants Committee of
the C.S.1.R. decided to undertake its systematic collection
and examination, particularly, in the first instance, for ©
5 Agric. Gaz. N.S.W. 1896, 7, 619.
CYANOGENETIC GLUCOSIDES. ole
hhydrocyanic,acid. Dr. H. R. Seddon, Director of Veterin-
ary Research, arranged through his Stock Inspectors to
collect samples from as wide an area of this State as pos-
sible, and in order that there should be no possibility of
loss of this volatile acid during transit to the laboratory, it
was decided to have the fresh samples placed immediately
after collection in bottles securely fastened with india-
rubber stoppers.
Dr. Seddon has already reported’ that one of these samples
proved fatal when fed to a sheep, and the symptoms shown
were those of prussic acid poisoning. The contents of the
stomach were submitted to us by Dr. Seddon, and were
found to contain hydrocyanic acid, as did the original speci-
men of the plant after merely macerating with water, show-
ing that it also contained the enzyme necessary for hydroly-
sis of the cyanogenetie substance. In the original scheme
of collection Dr. Seddon arranged to cover 35 areas coin-
eiding with the same number of Pasture Protection Dis-
tricts of N.S.W., and although during the past season we
examined 113 specimens from these localities, from only one
of these, viz., Brewarrina, which includes Bokhara, have we
obtained samples containing hydrocyanic acid; in all, 11
positive specimens were collected. During the present
season, however, positive samples have been obtained from
Dubbo and Merriwa, so that as the area of collection is
extended it may be found that the poisonous samples are
not so limited in distribution as at first seemed to be the
Case.
The Brewarrina plants were collected between the 24th
April and 28th July, 1928. Previous to the 7th June the
eyanogenetic substance in the plant was associated with
sufficient enzyme to ensure its decomposition when moist-
ened with water, and differed in this respect from the four
6 Journ. C.S.I.R. 1928, 1, 268.
374 H. FINNEMORE AND C. B. COX.
species of Acacia mentioned above which contained little,
if any, enzyme. Samples collected on 10th July, however, °
were found to be deficient in enzyme and only developed
their total amount of hydrocyaniec acid after enzyme from.
almonds had been added.
The amount of hydrocyanic acid obtained from these 11
specimens varied between 0.041 and 0.103 per cent., or 2.8
to 7.2 grains per lb., of the air-dried material; particulars.
are given in the following table.
TABLE B.
Amount of HCN Euphorbia Drummondi (whole plant)
| digit oee, 48 oe
Reference | Date Date |SEOb OZ Gao aa) oA as
Nene Source. | Collected.| Received. LE aS ohh) 80.8 © op
O85 elo Sale, el ay aed
a8 a eee ote ea eeeee
P I. 60 | Brewarrina | 24/4/28 | 27/4/28 | 61.0 | 0.038 | 0.085 |)
{o)
S+- 3
P.I. 61 | Bokhara i. » | 65.5 | 0.036 | 0.108 | 853
rae p,
P.I. 96| Brewarrina | 8/5/28 | 24/5/28 | 23.5 | 0.066 | 0.086 REE
j<=} q
Heo
P.I. 97 | Bokhara _ i 23.5 | 0.058 | 0.077 | J
P.I. 138 | Brewarrina | 7/6/28 | 15/6/28 | 44.9 | 0.055 | 0.097 | 0.099*
P.1. 139| Bokhara ‘ be 39.4 | 0.053 | 0.088 | 0.091*
P.I.195| Bokhara _| 10/7/28 | 13/7/28 | 3.0 | 0.039 | 0.041
PT. 196| Brewarrina e 5% 21.8 | 0.046 | 0.059
*After drying for 386 days.
The problem whether there is any ascertainable botanical
difference between the samples containing hydrocyanie acid
and those which do not is being undertaken by Dr. G. P.
Darnell-Smith, who has kindly examined all the above
specimens as to their identity.
CYANOGENETIC GLUCOSIDES. 375
Goodia lotifolia, Salish. :
_ In a series of Botanical Notes published in 1895 the late
Mr. J. H. Maiden’ included a note entitled ‘‘Is Goodia
poisonous to Stock?’’, and although he did not attempt to
answer this question in the affirmative, he adduced evidence
to show that the plant was under strong suspicion, but that
Opinion was divided on the subject.
Goodia is a genus of the Leguminosae, only two species
of which, G. lotsfolia (Salisb.), syn. G. medicaginea and
G. pubescens have been recorded. Indeed, the latter is
thought by some botanists to be a pubescent form of the
first. They are confined to Australia and occur as tall
shrubs, the former growing to the size of a small tree and is
the only one occurring in this State. In Tasmania it is
known as the clover tree, from the similarity of its delicate
leaves to clover. In Queensland its aboriginal name is
Booroo-molie.
Some of the foregoing particulars are due to Mr. Maiden,
who gave an account of an enquiry from Bega respecting
this shrub, known locally as the Indigo, the foliage of
which was frequently fatal to stock traveling from
Monaro to the coast. Large quantities at that time grew on
the main road between Colombo and Nimitybelle. The
same enquirer stated that cattle ate this plant greedily, and
suffered from what was termed black scour—the tongue
became black, the hide acquired a bluish tint and appeared
rough and bound, the cattle became weak and emaciated,
and eventually died. The form G. medicaginea has also been
suspected in West Australia, twenty-five head of cattle
dying from stoppage of the bowels. Another case of pois-
oning occurred in South Australia, and a correspondent
from Yorketown submitted to the Agricultural Bureau of
7 Agric. Gaz. N.S.W. 1895, 6, 306.
376 H. FINNEMORE AND C. B. COX.
that State a specimen of a plant supposed to be poisonous,
which was identified by the General Secretary of the Bureau
as a species of Goodia and pronounced to be quite harmless.
Mr. Maiden quotes the evidence of several South Aus-
tralian observers who had fed this plant to animals without
ill effect.
Such were the conflicting views of the toxicity of the
Goodias when a specimen of G. lotifolia gathered near
Middle Harbour in August of this year, just before
flowering, proved to be _ strongly cyanogenetic.
Or
That this Section desires to place on record its appre-
ciation of the long and valuable services rendered by Mr.
G. W. Card, A.R.S.M., as Curator of the Mining Museum
over many years, to geological science in N.S.W.
That the members desire to acknowledge gratefully
their indebtedness to Mr. Card for so constantly sending
exhibits to the meetings of the Section, thereby increasing
very materially the interest and value of these meetings.
That the Hon. Secretary be instructed to convey the
foregoing resolutions to Mr. Card, with the cordial
greetings and good wishes of the Section.
EXHIBITS:
. By Mr. Morrison: (a) Crystals of tantalite from Western
Australia; (b) Perthite from Broken Hill; (¢c) Photo-
graphs of prismatised sandstone occurring at the
Giant’s Castle, Lane Cove, and in a quarry 14 miles
south of Gordon.
. By Dr. W. R. Browne: Specimens of decomposed
Tertiary basalt from Wingello, N.S.W. These occur in
association with basalt, and possess a characteristic
violet colour, a feature recorded in connection with
basalt in similar association in other parts of the world.
By Mr. H. G. Raggatt: Specimen of analcite-dolerite
from a sill of probable Tertiary age which intrudes the
Upper Coal Measures at Broke, N.S.W.
By Mr. C. A. Sussmilch: (a) Suite of specimens from
the Albury district, comprising phyllites, schists, granite
with schist inclusions, and pegmatite; (b) Granite from
the Hume Reservoir Area.
By Mr. A. J. Shearsby: Photographs of cylindrical
econecretionary formation in the sandstone at Mosman.
ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. XXX1.
A discussion upon ‘‘The Occurrence of Bands in Coal
Seams, and their bearing on the origin of Coal, with special
reference to the Neweastle Coal Field,’’ was opened by
Mr. L. J. Jones.
Mr. Jones described clearly the occurrence of well-
defined bands in the Borehole Seam in the Newcastle-
Wallsend district, emphasising the uniformity of thickness
of the bands and the sharp boundaries existing between
band and coal. He pointed out that the coal was cften
laminated, and concluded that all the phenomena observed
could be explained only by assuming the coal to have
originated by deposition of plant-material transported from
some source, the bands then being due to special variations
in the conditions of deposition.
Professor Browne commented upon the features which
had been stressed by Mr. Jones, and thought the textural
variation to be seen in the bands might be the result of
the showering of tuff upon coal-measure swamps, but
considered that careful microscopic examination was
necessary before any conclusion could be reached. ;
Messrs. Andrews, Harper, Morrison, Raggatt, Sussmilch
and Osborne made brief contributions, and it was decided
to continue the discussion at the next meeting.
June 29, 1928.
Mr. Andrews was in the chair, and thirteen members
and three visitors were present.
It was unanimously resolved to send a letter of sympathy
to Mr. W. S. Dun on account of his severe illness.
EXHIBITS:
1. By Dr. W. R. Browne: (a) Specimens of tuff from the
Permo-Carboniferous marine beds at Twin Trig., near
Tallong, N.S.W., and from Bundanoon; (b) Siderite in
mamillary form with fibrous radial structure, from
basalt, Lismore, N.S.W.; (¢) Specimen of common opal
collected about 60 miles south of Dubbo.
2. By Mr. L. L. Waterhouse: (a) Two specimens of opal-
bearing jasperoid quartzite from Tallong; (b) Speci-
mens of bismuth-ore from a contact zone between
XXXII. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS
granite and limestone, at Riddell’s Mine, Duckmaloi,.
near Oberon, N.S.W.
3. By Mr. M. Morrison: Specimen of bright shale, not unlike:
bitumen, which by analysis appears to be a high-grade
eannel coal. Locality, Newnes, N.S.W.; (b) Coals with
bands from the Clarence River Series (Mesozoic).
4. By Mr. H. F. Whitworth: Celestine occurring in the-
gypsum beds cf Ivanhoe, N.S.W.
0. By Mr. Clark: Waterworn kerosene shale from Morna
Point, also photographs of raised beach at same place..
6. By Dr. A. B. Walkom: Two coal balls, of calcareous
concretionary character, containing well - preserved
plant-fossils, one ball from Belgium, and the other from.
the Lancashire Coal Field; (b) Coorongite from
Kangaroo I., S.A.; (c) Fossil plants from Yalwal.,.
N.S.W., viz.: Protolepidodendron yalwalen:e, Proto-
lepidodendron lineare, and Lepidodendron clarkei (?).
The study of these confirmed the assigning, by Mr.
Andrews, to the Yalwal beds of a Devonian age.
7. By Mr. G. D. Osborne: Specimens: of basalt and.
basaltic pumice from the Toowoomba district. Also,
in collaboration with Mr. Waterhouse, photographs of
the Toowoomba Quarry, which has been reserved in
the interests of science.
The discussion commenced at the previous meeting was.
continued.
Mr. Harper described some of the features in the seams.
of the Southern Coal Field, and concluded that these were:
evidence of the accumulation of coaly material in swamps
in which there were channels of drainage alternating with.
sand bars built up by the wind.
Dr. Browne reported having examined some of the mate-
rial of the bands microscopically, but found it very difficult
to make much out of the slides. He felt sure that if the
coal were transported, then there would be a certain amount.
of detrital material present in the coal. apart from the:
distinct bands.
ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. XXXlll..
Mr. Morrison reported the occurrence of a band in the:
Western Coal Field, with a thickness of one inch, which
was persistent over an area 50 miles in extent.
Mr. Sussmilch said that the association of kerosene
shale, which had developed im situ, with the coal seams was
a point in favour of the “Growth-in situ” theory.
Dr. Walkom thought the band referred to by Mr. Mor-
rison could not have originated by any of the ordinary
methods of mechanical sedimentation. He explained that
the advanced decay of woody tissue of plants produced a.
series of ulmins, leaving unaltered spores, etc. Thus in a
deposit of coal produced by the accumulation of transported
material, one would expect to find a smaller percentage of
spores than in the case of the plants decomposing i situ,
Mr. Waterhouse mentioned the vossibility of the bands:
developing at times when conditions were special, caused
by the incursion of the sea into the coal swamp areas.
Professor Cotton, Messrs. Andrews, Poole, Whitworth,
and Dr. Brennand also spoke briefly, and Mr. Jones replied
to many points raised in the whole discussion.
July 27, 1928.
Mr. Andrews was in the chair, and eleven members and’
SI1x visitors were present.
The Chairman welcomed Mr. Letchworth English,
Mineralogist from the F. A. Ward Foundation of Natural
Science in the University of Rochester, U.S.A.
1.
EXHIBITS:
By Mr. M. Morrison: (a) Spotted and banded sedi-.
mentary rock from Kimberley, W.A.; (b) Crystal of
rhodonite, in association with sulphide ore, from Broken:
Hill, N.S.W.
. By Mr. H. G. Raggatt: Schists, probably andalusite-
bearing, from Anembo, 15 miles south of Captain’s.
Flat, N.S.W.
. By Dr. A. B. Walkom: (a) Specimens of Lepidodendron
collected by Dr. Woolnough from 65 miles south of:
Bermagui. These have affinities with Protolepidodendron
and may be from an extension of the Yalwal beds ;,
XXXIV. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS.
(b) Small branch of Lepidodendron with leaves
attached, collected by Mr. Sussmilch, at Arden Hall,
Upper Hunter District, N.S.W.; (¢) Specimen of un-
usual Lepidodendron from the Karuah River District.
4. By Mr. G. D. Osborne: Conularia from the Upper
Marine Series at Branxton, N.S.W.
Assistant-Professor Browne opened a discussion on
““Tertiary Igneous Activity in N.S.W.’’
DISCUSSION :
Dr. Browne dealt with the rocks in a comprehensive
review, discussing their distribution, petrology and tectonic
relationships, and instituted comparisons and contrasts with
Tertiary rocks in other parts of Australia and elsewhere.
He pointed out that there was a wide area covered by the
rocks, which occurred as extrusions and intrusions, showing
a great variety of type. Thus there were rocks ranging
from ultrabasic to acid, with much variation in texture.
The basalts are all olivine-bearing, and nearly all contain
analcite, or nepheline or a zeolite. They are distinctly
alkaline, the intrusions being, in general, more alkaline
than the extrusions. The silica percentage ranges from 38
per cent. to 74 per cent., reaching the latter figure in the
rhyolites. A consideration of the norms of the analysed
rocks showed that only four of the basalts were ealcic.
Some of the intrusive masses are members of the quartz-
dolerite group. The basalts are not related closely to the
Plateau basalts, in the sense given to that term by
Washington. The relations of the N.S.W. rocks to the
Tertiary igneous rocks of Victoria and of Queensland are
not very well known.
The absence of major intrusions does not imply neces-
sarily that such do not exist at deeper levels of the crust.
Mr. C. A. Sussmilch pointed out that on physiographic
grounds the strongly alkaline lavas were to be considered
younger than the two main groups of basic lavas.
Professor Cotton spoke regarding the relationshiv be-
tween the distribution of the Tertiary lavas and the
tectonic structures of the eastern margin of the continent,
particularly between Central Eastern Queensland and
South-eastern New South Wales. He also referred to some
Tertiary necks in the New England district.
Mr. Osborne discussed the relations between the trends
of the dykes and the directions of jointing and faulting in
the Sydney-Blue Mountains region.
‘The discussion was then adjourned till the next meeting.
ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. XXXV.
August 31, 1928.
Mr. Andrews was in the chair, and eight members and
one visitor were present.
EXHIBITS:
1. By Mr. T. Hodge Smith: (a) Lithiophilite, a phosphate
of lithium and manganese; also a new mineral, hydro-
thorite, a hydrous silicate of thorium, and in addition
the caesium-beryl, vorobyevite: locality, Wodgina, W.A.
(b) Galena with hedenbergite, from Broken Hill.
The discussion on ‘‘ Tertiary Igneous Activity in N.S.W.’’
was continued.
Dr. Walkom pointed out that the division of the basalts
into “Older” and ‘“‘Newer” received no support from a
consideration of the floras of the “deep leads.” He also
drew attention to the occurrence of the alkaline masses of
the Glass House Mountains, to the east of the main line
of uplift in Eastern Australia.
Mr. Smith referred to the Kyogle district where the
volcanic succession seemed to fit in with Prof. Richards’
classification of the Queensland flows. He also suggested
correlation of some of the Tertiary flows by means of the
deuteric minerals present.
Mr. Andrews drew attention to the relations between the
distribution. of the flows and the margins of the old stable
blocks of Palaeozoic rocks. It seemed as if the leucite
lavas were poured out on the old blocks while folding
around the margin of these went on, and while the areas
of crumpling were characterised by volcanic vents giving
forth ash and lava. The plateau basalts flooded the old
stable blocks.
Professor Browne replied to many points raised, and
short contributions were made by Prof. Cotton and Mr.
Poole.
September 28, 1928.
Mr. Andrews was in the chair, and ten members and
two visitors were present.
The Secretary announced a proposed excursion to
Norton’s Basin on Saturday, October 20th, 1928.
0,0, cil ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS.
EXHIBITS:
1. By Sir Edgeworth David: Casts of Eurypterid remains
from the Adelaide (Lipalian) Series of Pre-Cambrian
age, The remains were of the nature of claws and
spines, probably representatives of the Merostomata.
2. By Mr. L. L. Waterhouse: A series of specimens from
the Bald Hills, Cathurst, illustrating the occurrence of
flows of basalt overlying Tertiary drift, which in turn
lies on decomposed granite, the last-named no doubt
having been weathered in Tertiary times.
3. By Mr. G. D. Osborne:_(a). Specimens of yoleanie ime
from the Narrabeen Series at Long Reef, N.S.W.;
(b) Specimens of sandstone, altered sandstone with
much coaly material, and sandstone with pronounced
slickensides, from the neighbourhood of the Basin
voleanie rock, Nepean River.
Professor L. A. Cotton addressed the section on “‘ Causes
of Diastrophism and their Status in Current Geological
Thought.”’
This lecture was along the lines of the Presidential
Address delivered by Professor Cotton to Section) C of the
A.A.A.S. at the Hobart (1928) Meeting, which address
has been published in the report of that meeting, pp. 171-
218.
The address was discussed by Sir Edgeworth David
and Mr. Osborne, and a reply made by Dr. Cotton.
October 26, 1928,
Mr. Andrews was In the chair, and nine members were
present.
A letter from Mr. G. W. Card returning thamicemamadl
greetings for the letter conveying the resolutions of May
18, was read.
ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. XXXVI,
The Secretary reported that a very successful excursion
had been held on Saturday, October 20, to the Basin, near
Mulgoa. About thirty-five members and friends attended,
and the trip was made in cars kindly made avaiable by
some of the members. The physiography. and general
geology of the very interesting region near the Basin
were studied.
NOTES AND EXHIBITS:
Mr. Andrews gave a brief report upon a recent trip
which he and the members of the Artesian Water Con-
ference had taken in the Broken Hill-Grey Range-Tibboo-
burra region. He exhibited many specimens to illustrate
his remarks, including a scratched boulder from (?) Lower
Cretaceous Glacial beds.
2. By Sir Edgeworth David: Casts of appendages of
EKurypterids from limestone in the Adelaide Series.
Also, on behalf of Miss D. R. Taylor: (a) Crustacean
remains from the Carboniferous Calciferous sandstone
of Gullane, Scotland; (b) Beautifully preserved
ammonite from the Oolite of Radstock, England.
3. By Mr. Poole: Panoramic photographs of the Basin
Area, Nepean River, showing features examined on the
excursion held on October 20.
4. By Mr. Osborne: (a) Crystal of quartz, showing
‘*shadow-erystal’’ nucleus; (b) Composite crystal of
quartz showing successive growth-zones; (¢) Coral sand-
rock from Norfolk Island sent by Mr. Card.
A committee consisting of Prof. Cotton, Dr. Walkom
and Messrs. Dun and Shearsby was appointed to enquire
into the matter of the delay in the reservation of the
Hatton’s Corner site.
PAPERS:
Two papers of mineralogical interest from current
literature were presented in abstract, as follows:
XXXVIIL. _ ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. '
1. “‘The Geology of the Platinum Metals,’’ by J. H. L.
Vogt. Presented in abstract by Mr. G. D. Osborne,
and discussed by Sir Edgeworth David and Mr.
Andrews.
2. “‘The Natural History of the Silica Minerals,’’ by
Austin F. Rogers. Presented by Mr. T. Hodge Smith
and discussed by Sir Edgeworth David and Mr.
Osborne.
November 30, 1928.
Mr. Andrews was in the chair and eight members and.
two visitors were present.
The Chairman referred to the sudden death of Mr. R. H.
Cambage, which had occurred three days previously, and
the following resolution was carried in silence:
“That the members of the Geological Section desire to
record their deep sense of the loss sustained by the death
of their beloved friend and colleague, Mr. R. H. Cambage,
and extend to the bereaved relatives their heartfelt
sympathy.”
A cordial welcome was extended to Mr. F. G. Forman,
of Western Australia, who exhibited two samples of natural
oil obtained by him from seepages in the Kerema District,
Gulf Division, Papua.
Mr. E. C. Andrews initiated a discussion upon ‘‘ The
Mechanics of Igneous Intrusion.’’
He gave a brief summary of the outstanding features
of the earth’s surface as a foundation for an enquiry into
the relation of intrusions and extrusions of magma through
the earth’s crust. He drew attention to the lines of
mountain ranges on the earth and their relation to vol-
canoes and bathylites. Mr. Andrews considered that the
mountain belts were essentially geanticlinal units in a
series of earth undulations or waves, and explained his
view of the migration of magma during the activity of
these undulations.
He believed that the intrusive igneous rocks came into
their places of crystallisation by a process akin to
“sweating” through the country rocks. He stressed the
~~
ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. XXXIX.
facts that most intrusions showed no feeders, and he
thought that the characteristics of form and origin of ore
bodies could be a guide to the study of intrusives.
Dr. Browne did not see eye to eye with the Chairman
in regard to the matter of the analogy between ore bodies
and igneous masses. He considered that the former were
very specialised units whose behaviour was probably quite >
different from that of bathylites. He found difficulty in
understanding the mechanism of the undulations or waves
which Mr. Andrews had! described.
Mr. Osborne gave a separate contribution to the discus-
sion by presenting a summary of the views of some of
the geologists of the British Survey regarding the
“cauldron-subsidence” phenomena to be observed at Glencoe
and in N.E. Ireland.
Mr. Andrews replied to some points raised, and the dis-
cussion was adjourned until the next meeting.
Aa—December 5, 1928.
SECTION OF INDUSTRY.
ABSTRACT OF THE PROCEEDINGS
OF THE
SECTION. OF INDUSTRY.
Officers—Chairman: A. D. Olle, F.C.8.; Honorary
Secretary: H. V. Bettley-Cooke.
As in 1927, the activities of the Section consisted of
visits to industrial establishments.
In all cases manufacturers gave a cordial welcome to
members and went to considerable trouble in explaining
their processes and in preparing exhibits.
The following visits were paid :—
May 15th, 1928—British-Australian Lead Manufacturer’s
Works, Cabarita.
June 19th, 1928—Goodyear Tyre and Rubber Co. (Aus-
tralia) Ltd.
July 17th, 1928—Nestle’s Chocolate Factory, Abbotsford.
August 21st, 1928—General Motors (Australia) Pty. Ltd.,
Marrickville.
September 18th, 1928—Australian Glass Manufacturers Co.
Ltd., Dowling Street, Waterloo.
October 9th, 1928—Messrs. Elliott Bros. Chemical Works,
Balmain.
November 27th, 1928—Messrs. Parke Davis & Company
Works, Rosebery.
December 11th, 1928—Sydney Harbour Trust Operations
on the Harbour.
Billy eka
SECTION OF PHYSICAL SCIENCE,
iA
m .
: '
oe A
lh
P fe
NX
’
. i ;
as
ee
- *
. i =, j
!
x
2 iY | 5 :
é ft e
. eter Lae
- os! ye
ig
)
\
= so <
'
‘ Gilet pacha yameityste
-
Rae : :
( ;
: —s
'
ie
f <
j
: :
4
l y ay
7 a
P:. ‘te
pee
ai
eee
water ve
Rene
+ ion
okey domme a ial
ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS
OF THE SECTION OF
PHYSICAL» SCIENCE.
Seven meetings were held during the year. The average
attendance was fifteen. At the May meeting the following
officers were elected:
Chairman—Assoe. Professor Wellish, M.A.
Honorary Secretary—G. H. Briggs, B.Se., Ph.D., F.Inst.P.
Committee—Associate Professor Bailey, M.A., Ph.D.,
Bainsie., Major KE. Ey Booth, MC Be.
F .Inst.P., Professor Madsen, D.Sec., Rev.
Mather Pivot. -S.J., Boal) MB. Mra Je I
Richardson, A.M.I.E.E., Professor Vonwiller,
Bec, Ho linstie:
April 18th, 1927.
Professor Bailey in the chair.
Mr. J. C. Jaeger read a paper on ‘‘The Motion of
Electrons in Pentane.’’
A sketch of the theory and experimental procedure
involved in Professor Bailey’s original 3-slit apparatus
was given. In the work on pentane, readings were taken
in this apparatus at values of z/p of 2.5, 5, 10, 20, 40 for
the determination of / and a. Experiments were then
made at the same values of z/p in a Townsend diffusion
apparatus for the determination of W. The values of a
are low and decrease with increasing z/p as in air, and the
probability h shows a similar rapid decrease at low values
of z/p. The k, z/p curve is nearly linear and of compara-
XI Vitt:. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS.
tively small slope, while the values of W show a rapid
initial rise. These peculiarities cause a maximum of Xd at
a low value of z/p. The same effect is shown by the
other polyatomic gases yet investigated CO., NO. and
C.H,, to the last of which pentane is specially similar. It
was suggested that this effect is connected with the
formation of ions.
Mr. J. D. McGee, M.Sc., read a paper on ‘*The Attach-
ment of Electrons to Molecules of Ammonia.’’
An outline of the theory of a three slit apparatus
designed by Professor Bailey was given. In this apparatus
the distance between the plates can be varied from 2 to 4
ems. Experiments with ammonia were made in order to
check the previous work of Professor Bailey and Mr. Higgs
using the older apparatus. Hydrogen was found in the
gas which they had used. With a fresh supply of pure
ammonia observations were made from z/p = 7 to z/p = 82:
and the values of a and k determined. It was found that
k& increased very.rapidly from k = 3 at z/p = 7 tok — 60
at z/p == 14. Over the same range a/p also increased rapidly
from 0.006 to 0.125.
From these results it was deduced that unless the drift
velocity of the electrons decreased rapidly over this range,
the probability of the attachment of an electron to a
molecule of ammonia must increase over this range. Hence
it appears that the probability of attachment is not in-
dependent of the velocity of the electron as was assumed
by Loeb.
May 16th, 1927.
Professor Wellish in the chair.
An address was given by Professor Madsen, D.Se. He
discussed—
ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. x]ix..
(1) the research in wireless being carried out in Great
Britain by the Radio Research Board;
(2) work on geophysical prospecting by Eve, Edge
and Bieler, and
(3) legal definitions of standards in various countries.
Professor V. A. Bailey, M.A., Ph.D., F.Inst.P., described
a rapid method for determining the pulsation © and
damping coefficient of free oscillations in any electric net-
work containing inductanees, resistances and capacities. At
any part of the network ‘an alternating sinoidal e.m.f. of
pulsation w and zero amplitude is introduced and the
equations for the currents in different parts of the network
are written down with the assistance of Kirchhoff’s rules,
but replacing the operator d/dt by wj as in the method of
complex operators.
The condition that these currents be different from zero,
as they must in the ease of free oscillations, is equivalent
to an equation A (wj) = 0 where J is the determinant
formed by the coefficients of the currents in the above
equations.
Each root w of this equation then gives the & and pu
of one of the free oscillations through the relation
w= 2 + pj.
In many special eases the above process is equivalent to
either of the following :—
(1) If the network can be regarded as a single eireuit
with impedence operator z; then the equation in
w will be 2 = 0.
(2) If the admittance operator y between any two
points in the network can be determined the
equation in w will be given by y = 0.
The use and value of the method was illustrated by
application to several standard cases.
4, ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS,
June 20th.
Professor Wellish in the chair.
Major E. H. Booth, B.Se., F.Inst.P., gave an address on
““Geophysical Methods of Prospecting.’’
July 18th.
Professor Wellish in the chair.
Mrs. G. H. Briggs gave an address on ‘‘ Recent Develop-
ments of Quantum Theory.’’
September 19th.
Professor Wellish in the chair.
Mr. W. G. Baker, B.Sc., B.E., read a paper on ‘‘ Radio
Broadcast Transmission in the Neighbourhood of Sydney.’’
Measurements of signal strength were made by L. 8. C.
Tippett, B.Sc., B.E., and W. G. Baker, BSc, Baby
receiving the signals on a loop interval tuned by a variable
condenser. The voltage in the loop was measured by a
Moulin type thermionic voltmeter. The observations were
restricted to a distance of about 20 miles from the station
2FC and were made along seven directions radiating from
the station, open spaces being chosen at each point.
The results, illustrated by a polar diagram, show in
general a much more rapid fall off to the north, over the
wooded country, than to the south. The absorption co-
efficient was measured in each direction and by making use
of Sommerfeld’s theory the conductivity of the ground was
deduced.
By integrating the power radiated over a hemisphere
and taking into account the absorption it was deduced that
82% of the 5000 watts input to the station is radiated.
October 17th.
The business of the meeting was a demonstvation of
experiments with diodes and triodes by Professor Bailey.
ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. le
In an introductory address Professor Bailey outlined the
methods and theory of the maintenance of oscillations by
valves and also the rectification of alternating current.
The experiments shown were—
(1) A triode oscillating simultaneously at a high and
a low frequency. The former oscillation being
shown by a neon lamp while the audible frequency
of oscillation was altered by a variable mutual
inductance.
(2) A short wave oscillator producing waves of about
3 meters wave length.
(3) A tuning fork maintained in vibration by a 3
electrode valve, telephone electro-magnets in the
plate and grid circuit being placed on either side
of the prongs of the fork.
(4) High frequency induction furnace consisting of a
— eoil of thick copper wire of about 20 turns and
4 em. diameter through which high frequency
oscillations pass. A piece of iron rapidly became
red hot when held in the coil. The same oscillating
system was used to show electrodeless discharges.
in vacuum tubes.
(5) Short waves were set up on a Lecher system, the
wave length being about 5 to 10 metres, and an
application to ‘the calibration of a wavemeter by
counting beats between the harmonies was de-
seribed.
The experiments were illustrated by diagrams of the
electrical circuits and were greatly appreciated.
November 21st, 1927.
Professor Wellish in the chair.
Mr. R. W. J. Mackay, B.Sc., B.E., gave an address on
‘* Electrica! Relays.”’
INDEX.
A Page Page
Abstract of Proceedings i-xxvi | Andrews, E. C., Awarded the
Geology oe se) XR VIIR-XL Clarke Memorial Medal ... xiii
Industry... ... xli-xlvi | Animal Diseases, ‘I'he Control of 53
Physical Science ... xlvi.li} Annual Dinner ... es. x
Acacia alata sah aa. we 159 Financial Statement FU hg
argentea bec Lae 229 LOL Report of the Council .. viii
bipinnatae ... Dee ... 162 | Anobium domesticum ... .. 3853
caesiella itd dae ... 154} Apothecia .., 135
calamiformes st ... 153 | Application of Science ‘to the
Cambagei... us log Sheep Industry _... pra
centaurer ... oe ... 153 | Asct ar Ae ain ... 136
Cheelit ER ... 869,371 | Ascospores Abe 43 i wlSe
.confusa 5a ee ... 158 | Atherosperma . . 350
Cunninghanit pen i OOO moschatum, Labillardiere .. 352
decurrens x. .. 163,165 | Atmospheric Effecton Flow from
Description of one New Springs at Kosciusko hedeal (S76
Species of... i -« 201 at Mittagong ... 198
doratoxylon ... ... 009 |} Australasian Association for the
epilobium ... Sic ... 153 Advancement of Science ... 13
ericifolia ... oe ... 153 | Australian National Research
Farnesiana ... ee ... 152 Council 13
glaucescens ... .. 869,371 | Australian Timbers of the Mon-
graveolens ... va ue Loe imiacez, Notes on Some .,. 359
gummiferae ... Ree ... 164
harpophylla ... 7 ame Oy B
homalophylla Ae ... 155 | Bacillus atterimus ee we O44
horrida <7 wwe > 16-4, 165 ellenbachiensis a we. 844
juliflorae... ee o. 209 graveolens ... mia oe B44
linophylla ... ma sar 160 megatherium... be wee B44
Lucasii n. sp. a ... 215 mucor . A me . 845
lysimachia ... as ... 153 mycoides ne he .. B44
melanoxylon ... ae si. LOZ NAGE 0 dae ee ... B44
merinthophora ade 159 ruminatus ... .. 847, 348
Mollissima ... ar 162, 164 subtilis ine a we 344
plurinerves ... sup .. 155 vulgatus .. 844
podalyriaefolia ts ... 216 | Backhousia angustifolia. .. w. 231
racemosae ... wile ways LO myrtifolia ... % woe 2O4
rubida Xxill. | Banksia Latifolia Ws lad
Seedlings, Part XIII. ... 152 | Barr, Robert Houston ..., cae
uninerves... 5 . 154] Blakely. W. FE.
Address, Brecidentil by or. Description of Three New
Douglas Stewart ... nis aati Species of Ee and
Aerobacter cloacae 34.4 One Acacia ... . 201
Alkalization and other Deuteric Booroo-molie Se: .. 875
Phenomena in the Saddle- Boronia anemonifolia 362, 264,
back aaa at Port 290, 291, 292, 294
Kembla sis . 303 var. anethifolius ... 296
Anaspidacea aie oo woe COU var. dentigera ... ... 801
antiquus 686 cee jc. 108 var. variablis ... was 20a
Anaspides .. ... 866 anethifolia .. 290, 294, 295
tasmaniae (Thomson) 24 Od bipinnata 290, 294, 295, 296
Andesite ... ee bite ace tne, var, citriodora... we. 300
INDEX,
Page |
Boronia citriodora 290, 294, 299, #00
dentigera 268, 290, 291, 294, 301
dentigeroides 264, 265, 290,
294, 301
falcifolia 290, 296, 299
Further Notes on the Genus 290
Gunnit 290, 294
hispida 2» 298
Muelleri 226, 232
Nand ... 290, 298
apmositifolia .. Perer4o sc)
palerfolia . 299
pilosa... 294
pinnata "295, 226, 207, 294,
var. citriodora .. . 200
polygalifolia... a joe
var. anemonifolia . 294
var. pinnatifolia . 294
var. robusta pare 4576
var. ternatifolia 4 2OW
var. trifoliolata 1298"
Rich in Ocimene, The Es-
sential Oil of a New Species
of Anemone Leaf . 268
rigens... 290, 297
safrolifera .. 227
tetrandra .. 293
var. grandiflora tee OO
tetrathecoides ‘av 297
trifoliata : ... 290
thujona e220 226,221, 232
variabilis 290, 295
Brady, Andrew John ... 4
Brown Rot of Fruits, and Dssoc-
lated Diseases, in Australia 99
Browne, W. kK.
On Some Aspects of Different-
ial Erosion ... 2723
On the Probable Tertiary Ace
of Certain New South Wales
Sedentary Soils... 251
Browne, W.R.,and H. P. White
Alkalization and Other Deu-
teric Phenomena in the
Saddleback Trachybasalt
at Port Kembla ... 803
Burfitt Prize Walter 12, She efi
Burindi Series (179
Cc
Cambage, R, H.
14, xv, xxlv
Acacia Seedlings. Part XIII. 152
The Outbreak of sigere in
Autumn , dehy lice
Cape, Alfred John hohe eh
Centaurer .. . 158
‘Chemistry of the
lili.
Page
Cheel, Edwin as 290
Further Notes on the Genus
Boronia . 290
Chemical Analysis of the Essen-
tial Oils. The occurrence of
a number of varieties of
Eucalyptus dives as deter-
mined by was NS
Exudation
from the Wood of Pentas-
podon Motleyt, The... ere:
Chilton, Chas.
Note on a Fossil Shrimp from
the Hawkesbury Sandstones 366
Clark, Wm., W. A. Greig and
C. A. Sussmilch
The Geology of Port Stephens 168
Clarke Memorial Medal 13
Conglomerates 179
Conidia ; 137
Control of Animal Diseases 53
Control of Drought 24,
Control of Pests... 52
Conularia .. XXXIV:
Cook, Bi- -Centenary of Captain
James ar eRe Xa
Cox, C. B. and H. Uiinneuinee
Cyanogenetic Glucosides in
Australian Plants ... 369
Cyanogenetic Glucosides in Aus-
tralian Plants «a7 O09
Cynanothannus tridactylites ... 292
D
Daphnandra aromatica, Bailey... 357
micrantha, Bentham .. oo
repandula, F. v. Mueller ... 356
Defective Oregon (Pseudotsuga
taxifolia), An Examination
of siete 232
Description of Three New Spec-
ies of Eucalyptus and One
Acacia 201
Differential Erosion, Some Ase
pects of ev 2S
Diospyros kaki . 122
Disease of Passion Fruit, Some
observations on the Woodi-
ness or Bullet eS)
Diseases in Australia, eown
Rot of Fruits and associated 99
Doryphora sassafras, Enilicher 350
E
Edge A. Broughton xv
Encouragement of Research 56
liv. INDEX.
Page Page
English, G. W. xviii | Fodder Production and Conserv- _
Epilobium = . 153 ation . 26.
Erosion-Scarps ... . 274 | Fossil Shrimp from the Hawkes-
Erosion, On some aspects of
differential i Hee PATER:
Essential Oil from a Eorouia
in the Pinnate Section ... 225
of a New Species of Anem-
one Leat Boronia Rich in
Ocimene, The
Tbe occurrence of a number
of varieties uf Eucalyptus
dives as determined by
chemical analysis of the 72
263
Eucalyptus acmenioides... 211, 212
anomala n. sp. 209, 211
Australiana hci TALE
Bott .. ... 2075-208
Consideniana 208, 205, 206, 208
corymbosa : ... 204
corynocalyx .. 377
Description of three New
Species of =. 201
dives .. (ay 74, 15,11, 15
dives as determined by
chemical analysis of the
Essential Oils 72
eugeniordes ... i Jeo de
haemastoma 201, 203, 204,
206, 207, 210, 211, 212
Joyceae n. sp. 201, 203. 205,
206, 207, 208, 209, 211, 212
micrantha 201, 203, 204
Muelleriana ... vole
nigra ... hoo
pilularis w. 214
piperita 203, 207
punctata abril
resinifera ... 204
robusta ee ral
Sieberrana 204, 206
stricta . 205
umbra ae 210 212
Ward n. sp. 212, 214
Eucarya spicata ... 64, 69
Euphorbia drummondi, Boiss ... 371
Facilities for Transportation ... 38
Fault-Line Scarps . 275
Fault-Scarps and Erosion-Scarps 274
Fereuson, Eustace William ... 5
Finnemore, H. and C, B. Cox
Cyanogenetic Glucosides in
Australian Plants ... . 869
bury Sandstones. Note on a 366
Fusanus spicatus ... 64:
G
Geology of Port Stephens, The 168
Gloeosporium fructigenum . 85
Glucoside, Extraction of the ... 868
Goodia lotifolia, Salisb ... 375, 376
medicaginea ... . 875
pubescens . 375:
Greig, W..A,, C. A. Sussmilch
and Wm. "Clark
The Geology of Port Stephens 168
Greig-Smith, Robert... .. 0,6
H
Hargrave, Lawrence xx
Harrison, Launcelot te 7
Harrison, T’. H.
Brown Rot of Fruits and As-
sociated Diseases, in Aus-
tralia .. 99
Hedycarya gnoustifolia, ae Cun:
ningham ... 360
Heterodendron olecfolia... . 376
Hypochaeris radicata . 149
Improved Animal Nutrition 39
K
Keele, Thomas William eS
Kabora ( .. : . 362
Krahmann, Rudolf bas sot ipa
L
Lepidodendron clarke XXxiil.
Leptospermum Liversidget same
Liversidge, Archibald ... 8, 9, 10
Medals of the late... . xxl
Research Lectureship ;
Vili, X, xxi
Lysimachia wo. 153
MM
MacDonald, Ebenezer ... se LOWS
Maiden Memorial re 12, xiii
Medal, Clarke Memorial eaale
Melaleuca leucadendron .. 4
Members, List of (IX)
Merostomata XXXVI.
Microconidia , 189)
INDEX. lv,
Page Page
Mollinedia ae alta Tulasne 359 Penfold, A. R.
Monilia. ... spot a) The Chemistry of Western
cinerea ae mi eee? Australian Sandalwood Oil,
f. pruni ... sated UP Part I. = po kon)
fructigena 108, 112, 114, 115
118, 120, 121, 122, 128, 124, 125
Monimiacee ... 800
Monthly Meetings of the Royal
Society of N.S.W xvi
Morrison, F. R. and A. R. Penfold
The Chemistry of the Exud-
ation from the Wood of
Pentaspodon Motleyi .. 218
The occurrence of a number
of varieties of Eucalyptus
dives as determined by
Chemical Analysis of the
Essential Oils. Part II.... 72
N
Noble, R. J.
Some observations on the
W oodiness or Bullet Disease
of Passion Fruit an
Neocalamites nes Hb xxix.
oO
Obituary—
Barr, Robert Houston 4
Brady, Andrew John 4
Cape, Alfred Cape.. : 4
Ferguson, Esutace Woltiawn 5
Greig-Smith, Robert 5,6
Harrison, Launcelot Oa
Keele, Thomas William Ths to
Liversidge, Archibald
MacDonald, Ebenezer 0)
Scammell, William Joseph 10
Taylor, George mis ee 11
Taylor, James fe 1]
Welch, William as Sh, 12
Outbreak of Springs in Autumn 179
Officers for 1928-29 aes 30 ce XL,
Oregon, An examination of de-
fective . 235
Oil, The Chemistry of Western
Australian Sandalwood ... 60
Oils, Oxidation of Crude meOt
P
Paraphyses hi ae eral ost
Passion Fruit, Some _ observ-
ations on the Woodiness or
Bullet Disease of ... Wi at
Passiflora coerulea deh se OS
edulis... me a 7Y, 88
The Essential “Oil ‘from a
Boronia in the Pinnate Sec-
tion. From Frazer Island,
Queensland .. 225
The Essential Oil of a New
Species of Anemone Leaf
Boronia Rich in Ocimene... 263
Penfold, A. R. and F.R. Morrison
The Chemistry of the Exud-
ation from the Wood of
Pentaspodon Motleyi #. 218
The occurrence of a number
of varieties of Eucalyptus
dives as determined by
Chemical Analysis of the
Essential Oils. PartII.... 72
Pentalonia nigrovenosa ... wee Oe
Pentaspodon Motleyi ... oo LS
Pests, the Control of ... aa lay?
Petrography ah : ..s 168
Physiography and Genera! Ge-
ology of Port Stephens 168
Popular Science Lectures ‘ix, XV
Poranthera corymbosa ie Oud
microphylla ... ay soe
Presidential Address by J.
Douglas Stewart... ae a
Protolepidodendron lineare XXXlll.
yalwalense ae XXXiil.
Prunus chinensis ... ie ... 103
persica es se ERO
Pseudotsuga Douglasii se ... 285
taxifolia Bas oe ... 285
R
Ranken, T., Tables of Metrology
and of Ancient Weights and
Measures _... x1x
Research, Encouragement of ... 56
Rhacopteris a oe aaa
(Anemites) inequilatera .. 180
Rhizoids ... wes ... 186
Rhyolite ... at Bag. es
Royal Society’s House ... Seah.
Rule 36 xviii, xx
Russell, Sir John a iV
s
Sale of Royal Society’s House... ix
Sambucus nigra .. . 871
Sandalwood Oil, The Chemistry
of Western Australian ...69)
lvi. INDEX.
Page : Page:
Santalum album ... . 64) Taylor, George Augustine 11
cygnorum... ... 64] Taylor, James... NOT fc
lanceolatum .. 63, 64, 69, 70 | Tertiary Age of Certain New
spicatum sy. .. 64 South Wales Sedentary Soils 251
Scammell, William J oseph 10 | The Chemistry of Western Aus-
Science House ... ix tralian Sandalwood Oil 60°
Science House, Exhibit ‘of the Thrips tabaci its ave 92
Prize Design ..xxv1 | Tomato Pulp, Notes on some
Sclerotinia 113, 115, 116, 130, 141 Organisms of . B41
aestivalis 133, 184, 140 | Toscanite ... . 174
Americana .. 112, 114, 125, Torula fructigena eid V2:
127, 128, 129, 142 | Trachybasalt at Port Kembla,
apothecia 140 Alkalisation and other Deu-
Australian ... 127, 128, 186 teric Phenomena in the
cinerea 112-118, 121-125, 128 Saddleback ... vo 803:
181, 138, 189, 142, 144, 145
forma Americania . 118
forma mali peel V
forma prunt .. 112} Variability in Physiographic
fructicola 112-114, 129- 131, Behaviour of Rock-Masses 279
134, 186, 137, 140, 141, 144, 145
fructigena 112-117
merea . 112 Ww
Sedimentary Rocks . 178 | Walter Burfitt Prize Xili, xviii
Sesquiterpenes, Distinction be-
tween Australian and Hast
Indian Oils by means of
Colour Reaction of . 70
Sheep Industry,The Application
of Science to the epg leh
Shoshonose : ne eal
Smith, Grafton, Elliot . = i
Soils, On the Probable Tertiary
Age of Certain New South
Wales Sedentary i251.
Springs in Autumn, Outbreak of 192
Stewart. J. Douglas
Presidential Address.. ti
Sussmilch, C. A., Wm. Clarkand
W.A. Greig
The Geology of Port Stephens 168
T
Tables of Metrology and of An-
cient Weightsand Measures xix
Water Supply and Conservation 31
Weather Forecasting 37
Welch, M. B.
An Examination of Defective
Oregon Pseudotsugataxifolia 235.
Notes on Some Australian
Timbers of the Monimiaceze
Welch, William .
White, H. P. and W. Re ‘Browne
Alkalization and other Deu-
teric Phenomena in the
Saddleback Rai ekiesil.
at Port Kembla ‘°... 2. 303:
Windred, G. L.
Notes on Some Organisms oe
Tomato Pulp aa
Woodiness or Bullet Disease of
Passion Fruit. Some ob-
servations on bie
Wool Production yen wale
300:
if:
34]
SYDNEY :
Frep. W. WuHitTe, PRINTER, 344 Kent STREET.
1929.
CONTENTS,
é Pace
. XIV.—The Essential Oil of a new species of Anemone leaf
_- Boronia, Rich in Ocimene. By A. BR. Punroup, F.A.C.L.,_
F.C.S. (Issued February 12th, 1929.) oe ww. 263
ArT. XV.—On some Aspects of Differential Erosion. By W. R.
. Browns, D.Sc. Wek = teat pee ——s gale
19th, 1929.)... ; 273
Art. XVI.—Further sakes on the Banna Bor onia. By B, Giant:
Be, (Issued February 19th, 1929.) ... Be i wes ae
Art. XVII.—Alkalization and other Deuteric oe in the
_ Saddleback Trachybasalt at Port Kembla. By W. R.
Browne. D.Sc. and H. P. Warts, F.C.S. [With Plates
XXIV, XXV and two text Paes J tiesved pees 19th,
1929.) ae 303
Art. XVIII.—Notes on some igshine of Tost Pulp. By
G. L. WInpRED, (communicated 2 Gilbert een):
Piro (Issued February 19th, 1929.) —... a 341
. XLX.—Notes on some Australian Timbers of the Monimiaceae.
By M. B. Wetcu, B.Sc., A.LC. [With Plates se Sie ne
feaned February 19th, 1929, Sauer wn in vet 350
Arr, XX.—Note on a Fossil Shrimp from the Hawkesbury Sand:
stones. By CHaruss Cuitton, M.A., D.Sc.,-M.B., (com-
municated by W. S. Dun). [With Plate XXX. | Cssued
February 19th, 1929.) ... — 366
Arr. XXI.—Cyanogenetic Glucosides in becieaien Pints By
H. Finnemwore, B.Sc.,.and C. B. se B.Sc. (Issued March
Me Lut + ONG ae ar Wa PDF is pie p Si eli Ss; Nk eee
; » f $ prez uy n ns x Sea oea, 2
‘ } ‘ “7 bid: eit a 7a, eset By te ag
“4 es ; t , ; r Port Mae a3, Pay
a ‘ i
j i
os
et
Se
dies Bail bh ss CARL
A
| 19th, 1929.)... ee < re = ae we 0369
___ AssTRact or Procezpines = > os Re a ee
: PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL SECTION .., a XXV1. — XXXIX.
PROCEEDINGS OF THE SeEcTION oF INDUSTRY ce aa xl. - xli,
- PROCEEDINGS OF THE SECTION OF PHyYsICAL SCIENCE oie xlv. —li.
_- Trrity Pace, Contents, Notices, PUBLICATIONS, ... wo ee vB)
OFFICERS FOR 1928-1929) 5 ae Pare ee oe wee (vii.)
List or Mempers, &c. ... tag cS chs ae ee Romes 95 |
InpEx To Voutume LXII. ee, ae ey ae ore gh bs
S
PEN Re ee amy Se
s
STITUTION LIBRARIES
tlh il
2 Seer re Pe ate ree ae a